[go: up one dir, main page]

CN116156166A - Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof - Google Patents

Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN116156166A
CN116156166A CN202310153413.2A CN202310153413A CN116156166A CN 116156166 A CN116156166 A CN 116156166A CN 202310153413 A CN202310153413 A CN 202310153413A CN 116156166 A CN116156166 A CN 116156166A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
coding unit
current
image decoding
filter
decoding device
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
CN202310153413.2A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
崔娜莱
艾琳娜·阿尔辛娜
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd filed Critical Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Publication of CN116156166A publication Critical patent/CN116156166A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/103Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
    • H04N19/105Selection of the reference unit for prediction within a chosen coding or prediction mode, e.g. adaptive choice of position and number of pixels used for prediction
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/103Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
    • H04N19/11Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode among a plurality of spatial predictive coding modes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/117Filters, e.g. for pre-processing or post-processing
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/132Sampling, masking or truncation of coding units, e.g. adaptive resampling, frame skipping, frame interpolation or high-frequency transform coefficient masking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/17Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
    • H04N19/176Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/42Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by implementation details or hardware specially adapted for video compression or decompression, e.g. dedicated software implementation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/597Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding specially adapted for multi-view video sequence encoding

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

The invention provides an image encoding method, an image decoding method and a device thereof. An image decoding method, comprising: obtaining information on transform coefficients of a current block from a bitstream; determining a filter for the current sample point based on at least one of a distance between the current sample point and a reference sample point in the current block and a size of the current block; obtaining a prediction block of the current block including prediction samples of the current samples generated using the determined filter; obtaining a residual block of the current block based on the obtained information on the transform coefficients of the current block; and restoring the current block based on the prediction block of the current block and the residual block of the current block.

Description

图像编码方法、图像解码方法及其装置Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof

本申请是向国家知识产权局提交的申请日为2018年10月31日、标题为“图像编码方法、图像解码方法及其装置”、申请号为201880084999.9的申请的分案申请。This application is a divisional application of the application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office with the filing date of October 31, 2018, titled "Image Coding Method, Image Decoding Method and Device", and application number 201880084999.9.

技术领域technical field

根据实施例的方法及其装置可以通过使用包括在图像中的各种形状的编码单元来对图像进行编码或解码。根据实施例的方法及其装置包括帧内预测方法及其装置。The method and apparatus thereof according to embodiments may encode or decode an image by using various shapes of coding units included in the image. The method and device thereof according to the embodiments include an intra prediction method and device thereof.

背景技术Background technique

随着能够再现和存储高分辨率或高质量图像内容的硬件正被开发和提供,对于有效地对高分辨率或高质量图像内容进行编码或解码的编解码器的需求正在增加。编码的图像内容可通过解码而被再现。最近,用于有效地对诸如高分辨率或高质量图像内容进行压缩的方法已被实行。例如,通过对将经由任意方法被编码的图像进行处理来执行有效地对图像进行压缩的方法。As hardware capable of reproducing and storing high-resolution or high-quality image content is being developed and provided, demands for codecs that efficiently encode or decode high-resolution or high-quality image content are increasing. Encoded image content can be reproduced by decoding. Recently, methods for efficiently compressing content such as high-resolution or high-quality images have been implemented. For example, a method of efficiently compressing an image is performed by processing an image to be encoded via an arbitrary method.

各种数据单元可以用于对图像进行压缩,并且包含关系可存在于这些数据单元间。数据单元可由各种方法被划分以确定用于这些图像压缩的数据单元的尺寸,并且随着根据图像的特征而被优化的数据单元被确定,由此可以对图像执行编码或解码。Various data units can be used to compress the image, and a containment relationship can exist between these data units. The data unit may be divided by various methods to determine the size of the data unit used for compression of these images, and as the data unit optimized according to the characteristics of the image is determined, encoding or decoding may be performed on the image.

发明内容Contents of the invention

技术方案Technical solutions

根据实施例的图像解码方法其包括:从比特流获得关于当前块的变换系数的信息;基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器;获得包括使用所确定的滤波器而产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块;基于所获得的关于当前块的变换系数的信息来获得当前块的残差块;以及基于当前块的预测块和当前块的残差块来恢复当前块。An image decoding method according to an embodiment, which includes: obtaining information about a transform coefficient of a current block from a bitstream; a filter for the current sample; obtaining a prediction block of the current block including a prediction sample of the current sample generated using the determined filter; obtaining the current block based on the obtained information about the transform coefficient of the current block and restoring the current block based on the prediction block of the current block and the residual block of the current block.

基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的类型和所述滤波器的系数。The step of determining the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample and the size of the current block may include: At least one of the distance between samples and the size of the current block is used to determine the type of filter used for the current sample and the coefficients of the filter.

所述滤波器的类型可以是低通滤波器(low pass filter)、高斯滤波器(Gaussianfilter)、双边滤波器(bilateral filter)、均匀滤波器(uniform filter)、双线性插值滤波器(bilinear interpolation filter)、三次滤波器(cubic filter)和离散余弦变换(Discrete Cosine Transform;DCT)滤波器(DCT filter)之一。The type of filter can be low pass filter (low pass filter), Gaussian filter (Gaussian filter), bilateral filter (bilateral filter), uniform filter (uniform filter), bilinear interpolation filter (bilinear interpolation filter), cubic filter (cubic filter) and discrete cosine transform (Discrete Cosine Transform; DCT) filter (DCT filter).

用于当前样点的滤波器的抽头数是预定的值,或者基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定。预定的值可以是等于或大于4的整数。The number of taps of the filter for the current sample is a predetermined value, or is determined based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample and the size of the current block. The predetermined value may be an integer equal to or greater than 4.

基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:基于当前块的尺寸和当前块中的样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器;以及在用于当前块的多个滤波器中确定与当前样点相对应的滤波器。The step of determining the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample and the size of the current block may include: based on the size of the current block and the size of the current block determining a plurality of filters for the current block by at least one of the distances between the sample point and the reference sample point; and determining a filter corresponding to the current sample point among the plurality of filters for the current block.

基于当前块的尺寸和当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器的步骤可以包括:基于当前块的高度或宽度和当前块中的样点与参考样点之间的距离的比率来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器。The step of determining a plurality of filters for the current block based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample may include: based on the height or width of the current block and the current The ratio of the distance between the samples in the block and the reference samples is used to determine the number of filters for the current block.

基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:基于当前块的帧内预测模式来确定与当前块中的样点相对应的第一参考样点;基于所述样点与第一参考样点之间的距离来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器;以及在用于当前块的多个滤波器中确定与当前样点相对应的滤波器。The step of determining the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample and the size of the current block may include: determining based on the intra prediction mode of the current block a first reference sample corresponding to a sample in the current block; determining a plurality of filters for the current block based on a distance between the sample and the first reference sample; and A filter corresponding to the current sample point is determined among the plurality of filters.

基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:基于当前块的尺寸来确定用于当前块的滤波器的数量,并且确定与所述滤波器的数量相对应的用于当前块的滤波器;以及基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸来在用于当前块的滤波器中确定用于当前样点的滤波器。The step of determining the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample and the size of the current block may include: determining the filter for the current sample based on the size of the current block the number of filters for the block, and determine the filter for the current block corresponding to the number of filters; and based on the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point and the size of the current block The filter for the current sample is determined in the filters for the block.

基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:进一步基于当前块的帧内预测模式和当前块的形状中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。The step of determining the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample and the size of the current block may include: further based on the intra prediction mode and At least one of the shapes of the current block to determine the filter for the current sample.

进一步基于当前块的帧内预测模式和当前块的形状(shape)中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:The step of determining the filter for the current sample further based on at least one of the intra prediction mode of the current block and the shape of the current block may include:

当当前块的帧内预测模式是预定的帧内预测模式时,基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。When the intra prediction mode of the current block is a predetermined intra prediction mode, the current sample is determined based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample and the size of the current block. filter.

进一步基于当前块的帧内预测模式和当前块的形状(shape)中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:The step of determining the filter for the current sample further based on at least one of the intra prediction mode of the current block and the shape of the current block may include:

当当前块的宽度小于或等于预定的第一值,并且当前块的高度小于或等于预定的第二值时,基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。When the width of the current block is less than or equal to a predetermined first value, and the height of the current block is less than or equal to a predetermined second value, based on the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point in the current block and the size of the current block at least one of them to determine the filter to use for the current sample.

基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的步骤可以包括:当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离小于预定的值时,确定用于当前样点的第一滤波器,当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离大于预定的值时,确定用于当前样点的第二滤波器,第一滤波器的平滑强度可以小于第二滤波器的平滑强度。The step of determining the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and the size of the current block may include: when the distance between the current sample and the reference sample When the distance is less than a predetermined value, determine the first filter for the current sample point, and when the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than a predetermined value, determine the second filter for the current sample point, The smoothing strength of the first filter may be less than the smoothing strength of the second filter.

根据实施例的图像编码方法包括:基于当前块中的当前样点与参考前样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器;产生包括使用所确定的滤波器而产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块;以及基于当前块的预测块来对关于当前块的变换系数的信息进行编码。An image encoding method according to an embodiment includes: determining a filter for a current sample based on at least one of a distance between a current sample in a current block and a reference previous sample and a size of the current block; generating includes using the A prediction block of a current block of a prediction sample of the current sample generated by the determined filter; and encoding information about a transform coefficient of the current block based on the prediction block of the current block.

根据实施例的图像解码装置包括:处理器,其从比特流获得关于当前块的变换系数的信息;基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器;获得包括使用所确定的滤波器而产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块;基于所获得的关于当前块的变换系数的信息来获得当前块的残差块;以及基于当前块的预测块和当前块的残差块来恢复当前块。An image decoding device according to an embodiment includes: a processor that obtains information about transform coefficients of a current block from a bitstream; one to determine a filter for the current sample point; obtain a prediction block of the current block including a prediction sample point of the current sample point generated using the determined filter; based on the obtained information about the transform coefficient of the current block obtaining a residual block of the current block; and restoring the current block based on the predicted block of the current block and the residual block of the current block.

根据本公开的实施例,关于图像解码方法的一种计算机程序可以被记录在计算机可读记录介质上。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a computer program related to an image decoding method may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium.

附图说明Description of drawings

图1a图示根据各种实施例的图像解码装置的框图。Fig. 1a illustrates a block diagram of an image decoding device according to various embodiments.

图1b图示根据各种实施例的图像解码方法的流程图。Fig. 1b illustrates a flowchart of an image decoding method according to various embodiments.

图1c图示根据各种实施例的图像解码器的框图。Fig. 1c illustrates a block diagram of an image decoder according to various embodiments.

图1d图示根据各种实施例的图像解码装置的框图。Fig. 1d illustrates a block diagram of an image decoding device according to various embodiments.

图2a图示根据各种实施例的图像编码装置的框图。Fig. 2a illustrates a block diagram of an image encoding device according to various embodiments.

图2b图示根据各种实施例的图像编码方法的流程图。Fig. 2b illustrates a flowchart of an image encoding method according to various embodiments.

图2c图示根据各种实施例的图像解码器的框图。Fig. 2c illustrates a block diagram of an image decoder according to various embodiments.

图2d图示根据各种实施例的图像编码装置的框图。Fig. 2d illustrates a block diagram of an image encoding device according to various embodiments.

图3图示根据实施例的随着图像解码装置划分当前编码单元而确定至少一个编码单元的过程。FIG. 3 illustrates a process of determining at least one coding unit as an image decoding device splits a current coding unit, according to an embodiment.

图4图示根据实施例的图像解码装置划分具有非正方形形状的编码单元来确定至少一个编码单元的过程。FIG. 4 illustrates a process in which an image decoding device divides coding units having a non-square shape to determine at least one coding unit, according to an embodiment.

图5图示根据实施例的图像解码装置基于块形状信息和划分形状模式信息中的至少一个来划分编码单元的过程。FIG. 5 illustrates a process in which an image decoding device splits a coding unit based on at least one of block shape information and split shape pattern information according to an embodiment.

图6图示根据实施例的由图像解码装置从奇数个编码单元当中确定预定的编码单元的方法。FIG. 6 illustrates a method of determining a predetermined coding unit from among odd coding units by an image decoding device, according to an embodiment.

图7图示根据实施例的当图像解码装置划分当前编码单元而确定多个编码单元时处理多个编码单元的顺序。FIG. 7 illustrates an order of processing a plurality of coding units when an image decoding device divides a current coding unit to determine a plurality of coding units, according to an embodiment.

图8图示根据实施例的当编码单元不可由图像解码装置以预定的顺序处理时确定当前编码单元被划分为奇数个编码单元的过程。FIG. 8 illustrates a process of determining that a current coding unit is split into an odd number of coding units when the coding units cannot be processed by an image decoding device in a predetermined order, according to an embodiment.

图9图示根据实施例的随着图像解码装置划分第一编码单元而确定至少一个编码单元的过程。FIG. 9 illustrates a process of determining at least one coding unit as an image decoding device splits a first coding unit, according to an embodiment.

图10图示根据实施例图像编码装置当第一编码单元被划分而确定的具有非正方形形状的第二编码单元满足预定的条件时第二编码单元可被划分的形状被限制。FIG. 10 illustrates that a shape in which a second coding unit may be divided is limited when a second coding unit determined to have a non-square shape by which a first coding unit is divided satisfies a predetermined condition, according to an embodiment of an image encoding device.

图11图示根据实施例的当划分形状模式信息不能指示编码单元被划分为四个正方形形状时图像解码装置划分具有正方形形状的编码单元的过程。11 illustrates a process in which an image decoding device divides a coding unit having a square shape when the division shape pattern information cannot indicate that the coding unit is divided into four square shapes, according to an embodiment.

图12图示根据实施例的多个编码单元的处理顺序可以根据划分编码单元的过程变化。FIG. 12 illustrates that a processing order of a plurality of coding units may vary according to a process of dividing a coding unit according to an embodiment.

图13图示根据实施例的当编码单元被递归地划分来确定多个编码单元时编码单元的深度随着编码单元的形状和尺寸变化而被确定的过程。13 illustrates a process in which a depth of a coding unit is determined as the shape and size of the coding unit vary when the coding unit is recursively split to determine a plurality of coding units, according to an embodiment.

图14图示根据实施例的可以根据编码单元的形状和尺寸来确定的深度和用于区分编码单元的索引(part index,在下文中称PID)。FIG. 14 illustrates a depth and an index (part index, hereinafter PID) for distinguishing a coding unit, which may be determined according to a shape and size of a coding unit, according to an embodiment.

图15图示根据实施例的根据包括在画面中的多个预定的数据单元来确定多个编码单元。FIG. 15 illustrates determining a plurality of coding units according to a plurality of predetermined data units included in a picture, according to an embodiment.

图16图示根据实施例的用作确定包括在画面中的参考编码单元的确定顺序的准则的处理块。16 illustrates processing blocks used as a criterion for determining a determination order of reference coding units included in a picture according to an embodiment.

图17为用于说明根据实施例的帧内预测模式的图。FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an intra prediction mode according to an embodiment.

图18为用于说明根据本公开的实施例,图像解码装置基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个,通过使用不同的滤波器来产生当前样点的预测样点的方法。18 is a diagram for explaining that according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, an image decoding device generates a current sample by using different filters based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample and the size of the current block. Method for predicting sample points.

图19为用于说明根据本公开的实施例,基于编码顺序标志将编码单元之间的编码(解码)顺序确定为正向或反向,根据确定的编码(解码)顺序右部参考线或上部参考线可以用于帧内预测的图。FIG. 19 is used to illustrate that according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the encoding (decoding) order between coding units is determined as forward or reverse based on the encoding order flag, and the right reference line or the upper part is determined according to the encoding (decoding) order. Reference lines can be used for intra-predicted images.

最佳模式best mode

根据各种实施例的视频解码方法包括:从比特流获得关于当前块的变换系数的信息;基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器;获得包括使用所确定的滤波器而产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块;基于所获得的关于当前块的变换系数的信息来获得当前块的残差块;以及基于当前块的预测块和当前块的残差块来恢复当前块。A video decoding method according to various embodiments includes: obtaining information about transform coefficients of a current block from a bitstream; determining a filter for the current sample; obtaining a prediction block of the current block including a prediction sample of the current sample generated using the determined filter; obtaining the current a residual block of the block; and restoring the current block based on the predicted block of the current block and the residual block of the current block.

根据各种实施例的视频编码方法包括:基于当前块中的当前样点与参考前样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器;产生包括使用所确定的滤波器而产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块;以及基于当前块的预测块来对关于当前块的变换系数的信息进行编码。A video encoding method according to various embodiments includes: determining a filter for a current sample based on at least one of a distance between a current sample in a current block and a reference previous sample and a size of the current block; generating a filter comprising: a prediction block of the current block of a prediction sample of the current sample generated using the determined filter; and encoding information on transform coefficients of the current block based on the prediction block of the current block.

根据各种实施例的视频解码装置包括:处理器,其从比特流获得关于当前块的变换系数的信息;基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器;获得包括使用所确定的滤波器而产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块;基于所获得的关于当前块的变换系数的信息来获得当前块的残差块;以及基于当前块的预测块和当前块的残差块来恢复当前块。A video decoding apparatus according to various embodiments includes: a processor that obtains information about transform coefficients of a current block from a bitstream; to determine a filter for the current sample; obtain a prediction block of the current block including a prediction sample of the current sample generated using the determined filter; information to obtain a residual block of the current block; and restore the current block based on the prediction block of the current block and the residual block of the current block.

根据本公开的另一方面,一种计算机可读记录介质在其上记录有用于执行根据各种实施例的方法的程序。According to another aspect of the present disclosure, a computer readable recording medium has recorded thereon a program for executing methods according to various embodiments.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

参考以下后述的实施例以及附图,所公开的实施例的优点和特征,以及实现该优点和特征的方法将变得更加明确。然而,本公开并不限于在以下公开的实施例,可以以各种不同的形式实现,本实施例只提供用于使本公开更加完整,向本公开所属领域的技术人员完整地告知发明的范围。The advantages and features of the disclosed embodiments, and methods for achieving the advantages and features will become more apparent with reference to the embodiments described below and the accompanying drawings. However, the present disclosure is not limited to the embodiments disclosed below, and can be implemented in various forms, and the present embodiments are provided only to make the present disclosure more complete and to fully inform those skilled in the art to which the present disclosure belongs the scope of the invention. .

将简要描述在说明书中使用的术语,并且将详细地描述所公开的实施例。Terms used in the specification will be briefly described, and the disclosed embodiments will be described in detail.

在本说明书中使用的术语已经选择了在考虑本公开中的功能时当前可能被广泛使用的通用术语,但是可以根据所属技术领域的技术人员的意图或判例、新技术的出现等来改变。另外,一些术语可由申请人任意选择,并且在这种情况下,选择的术语的含义将在所属的发明内容中被详细地描述。因此,本公开中使用的术语应基于术语的含义以及整个说明书中的描述来定义,而不仅仅是术语的名称。The terms used in this specification have selected general terms that may be widely used currently when functions in the present disclosure are considered, but may be changed according to intentions of those skilled in the art or precedents, appearance of new technologies, and the like. Also, some terms may be arbitrarily selected by the applicant, and in this case, the meanings of the selected terms will be described in detail in the attached Summary of the Invention. Therefore, the terms used in the present disclosure should be defined based on the meanings of the terms and the descriptions throughout the specification, not just the names of the terms.

除非以单数形式使用的表述在上下文中具有明显不同的含义,否则以单数形式使用的表述包括复数表述。Expressions used in the singular include plural expressions unless the expressions used in the singular have clearly different meanings in the context.

在说明书中,当某一部件包括”某个构成要素时,除非存在与其相反的明确描述,否则该部件可进一步包括其他构成要素,而不排除其他构成要素。In the specification, when a certain component includes "a certain constituent element, unless there is an explicit description to the contrary, the component may further include other constituent elements without excluding other constituent elements.

另外,说明书中使用的术语“-器”是指软件或硬件构成要素,并且“-器”执行预定的功能。然而,术语“-器”不限于软件或硬件。“-器”可被形成为位于可寻址存储介质中,或者可被形成为再现一个或更多个处理器。因此,作为一个实施例,“-器”包括诸如软件构成要素、面向对象的软件构成要素、类构成要素和任务构成要素的构成要素,并可包括进程、功能、函数、属性、步骤、子例程、程序代码段、驱动器、固件、微代码、电路、数据、数据库、数据结构、表、数组或变量。在构成要素和“-器”内提供的功能可以由较少数量的构成要素和“-器”结合,或者可由附加构成要素和“-器”被划分。In addition, the term "device" used in the specification refers to a software or hardware constituent element, and the "device" performs a predetermined function. However, the term "device" is not limited to software or hardware. A "device" may be formed to reside in an addressable storage medium, or may be formed to reproduce one or more processors. Thus, as an example, a "device" includes components such as software components, object-oriented software components, class components, and task components, and may include processes, functions, functions, attributes, steps, subcases program, program code segment, driver, firmware, microcode, circuit, data, database, data structure, table, array, or variable. Functions provided within the constituent elements and "device" may be combined by a smaller number of constituent elements and "device", or may be divided by additional constituent elements and "device".

根据本公开的实施例,“-器”可以被实现为处理器和存储器。术语“处理器”应广义地解释为包括通用处理器、中央处理器、微处理器、数字信号处理器、控制器、微控制器、状态机等。在一些环境中,“处理器”可以是指专用集成电路、可编程逻辑器件、现场可编程门阵列等。术语“处理器”是指处理装置的组合,例如数字信号处理器和微处理器的组合、多个微处理器的组合、与离散余弦变换内核结合的一个或多个微处理器的组合,或者此类装置的任何其他组合。According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a "memory" may be implemented as a processor and a memory. The term "processor" should be broadly construed to include general purpose processors, central processing units, microprocessors, digital signal processors, controllers, microcontrollers, state machines, and the like. In some contexts, "processor" may refer to an application specific integrated circuit, programmable logic device, field programmable gate array, or the like. The term "processor" means a combination of processing devices, such as a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, a combination of multiple microprocessors, a combination of one or more microprocessors combined with a discrete cosine transform core, or Any other combination of such devices.

术语“存储器”应广义地解释为包括能够存储电子信息的任何电子组件。术语存储器可以是指各种类型的处理器可读介质,例如随机存取存储器、只读存储器、非易失性随机存取存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、闪存、磁或光数据存储器、寄存器等。如果处理器可以从该存储器读取信息和/或将信息写入该存储器,则该存储器被称为与处理器处于电子通信状态。集成在处理器中的存储器与处理器处于电子通信状态。The term "memory" should be interpreted broadly to include any electronic component capable of storing electronic information. The term memory may refer to various types of processor-readable media such as random access memory, read-only memory, non-volatile random-access memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electronic Erasable programmable read-only memory, flash memory, magnetic or optical data storage, registers, etc. A memory is said to be in electronic communication with a processor if the processor can read information from and/or write information to the memory. Memory integrated into a processor is in electronic communication with the processor.

以下,“图像”可以表示诸如视频的静止图像的静态图像或者诸如视频(即,视频本身)的动态图像。Hereinafter, "image" may mean a still image such as a still image of a video or a moving image such as a video (ie, the video itself).

在下文中,“样点”是指被分配给图像的采样位置并且将被处理的数据。例如,空间域的图像中的像素值或变换域上的变换系数可以是样点。包括至少一个样点的单元可被定义为块。Hereinafter, "sample" refers to data that is assigned to a sampling position of an image and is to be processed. For example, pixel values in an image in the spatial domain or transform coefficients in the transform domain may be samples. A unit including at least one sample may be defined as a block.

在下文中,将参考附图详细描述实施例,以本公开所属领域的技术人员可以容易地实施。另外,为了在附图中明确地描述本公开,省略了与描述无关的部分。Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings so that those skilled in the art to which the present disclosure pertains can easily implement. In addition, in order to clearly describe the present disclosure in the drawings, parts irrelevant to the description are omitted.

在下文中,将参照图1至19详细描述图像编码装置和图像解码装置、图像编码方法和图像解码方法。参照图3至16描述根据实施例确定图像的数据单元的方法,并且参照图1-2和图17至19描述图像编码或图像解码方法及其装置,其根据实施例基于到参考样点的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定滤波器,并且使用所确定的滤波器来自适应地执行帧内预测。Hereinafter, an image encoding device and an image decoding device, an image encoding method, and an image decoding method will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 19 . A method of determining a data unit of an image according to an embodiment is described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 16 , and an image encoding or image decoding method and device thereof are described with reference to FIGS. 1-2 and FIGS. 17 to 19 , which are based on the distance to a reference sample point according to an embodiment A filter is determined by at least one of a size of a current block and a size of a current block, and intra prediction is adaptively performed using the determined filter.

在下文中,将参照图1和2描述根据本公开的一实施例的基于各种形状的编码单元来自适应地执行帧内预测的图像编码/解码方法及其装置。Hereinafter, an image encoding/decoding method and apparatus thereof for adaptively performing intra prediction based on coding units of various shapes according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 .

图1a是根据各种实施例的图像解码装置的框图。FIG. 1a is a block diagram of an image decoding device according to various embodiments.

根据各种实施例的图像解码装置100可以包括获得器105、帧内预测器110和图像解码器115。The image decoding device 100 according to various embodiments may include an obtainer 105 , an intra predictor 110 and an image decoder 115 .

获得器105、帧内预测器110和图像解码器115可以包括至少一个处理器。另外,获得器105、帧内预测器110和图像解码器115可以包括存储器,其存储将由至少一个处理器执行的指令。图像解码器115可以以与获得器105和帧内预测器110分开的硬件来实现,或者可以包括获得器105和帧内预测器110。The obtainer 105, the intra predictor 110, and the image decoder 115 may include at least one processor. Additionally, the obtainer 105, the intra predictor 110, and the image decoder 115 may include a memory storing instructions to be executed by at least one processor. The image decoder 115 may be implemented in hardware separate from the obtainer 105 and the intra predictor 110 , or may include the obtainer 105 and the intra predictor 110 .

获得器105可以从比特流获得关于当前块的变换系数的信息。获得器105可以从比特流获得关于当前块的预测模式的信息和关于当前块的帧内预测模式的信息。The obtainer 105 may obtain information on transform coefficients of a current block from a bitstream. The obtainer 105 may obtain information on a prediction mode of a current block and information on an intra prediction mode of a current block from a bitstream.

获得器105可以包括指示关于当前块的预测模式是帧内预测模式或帧间预测模式的信息。关于当前块的帧内预测模式的信息可以是关于在多个帧内预测模式中应用于当前块的帧内预测模式的信息。例如,帧内预测模式可以是DC模式、平面模式和具有预测方向的至少一个角度模式中的一种。角度模式可以包括水平模式、垂直模式和对角线模式,并且可以包括具有除了水平方向、垂直方向和对角线方向之外的预定的方向的模式。例如,角度模式的数量可以是65或33。The obtainer 105 may include information indicating that a prediction mode with respect to a current block is an intra prediction mode or an inter prediction mode. The information on the intra prediction mode of the current block may be information on the intra prediction mode applied to the current block among a plurality of intra prediction modes. For example, the intra prediction mode may be one of a DC mode, a planar mode, and at least one angle mode with a prediction direction. The angle pattern may include a horizontal pattern, a vertical pattern, and a diagonal pattern, and may include a pattern having a predetermined direction other than the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the diagonal direction. For example, the number of angle patterns can be 65 or 33.

当当前块的预测模式是帧内预测模式时,可以激活帧内预测器110。When the prediction mode of the current block is an intra prediction mode, the intra predictor 110 may be activated.

帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的帧内预测模式来对当前块执行帧内预测。帧内预测器110可以基于当前块中的当前样点的位置和当前块的帧内预测模式,在参考样点中确定用于当前样点的参考样点,并且可以使用用于当前样点的参考样点来产生当前样点的预测样点值。这里,参考样点可以包括与当前块相邻的左部或上部的参考线的样点。用于当前样点的参考样点可以包括在当前块的左部或上部的参考线的样点中的至少一个邻近当前块的样点。当用于当前样点的参考样点只有一个时,帧内预测器110可以使用该参考样点来产生当前样点的预测样点值。同时,当存在两个或更多用于当前样点的参考样点时,帧内预测器110可以通过对用于当前样点的两个或更多个参考样点的样点值应用滤波器来产生当前样点的预测样点。这里,滤波器的系数可以是整数。为了将滤波器的系数确定为整数,对滤波器的系数执行缩放,并且可以使用缩放的滤波器的系数。当对滤波器的系数执行缩放并且使用缩放的滤波器的系数时,此后可以根据滤波器的系数的缩放程度进行去缩放的过程。滤波器的准确度可以是1/32分数像素的准确度。The intra predictor 110 may perform intra prediction on a current block based on an intra prediction mode of the current block. The intra predictor 110 may determine a reference sample for the current sample among the reference samples based on the position of the current sample in the current block and the intra prediction mode of the current block, and may use the A reference sample is used to generate a predicted sample value for the current sample. Here, the reference samples may include samples of a left or upper reference line adjacent to the current block. The reference samples for the current sample may include at least one sample adjacent to the current block among the samples of the reference line on the left or upper of the current block. When there is only one reference sample for the current sample, the intra predictor 110 can use the reference sample to generate the predicted sample value of the current sample. Meanwhile, when there are two or more reference samples for the current sample, the intra predictor 110 may apply a filter to the sample values of the two or more reference samples for the current sample by to generate the predicted sample point of the current sample point. Here, the coefficients of the filter may be integers. In order to determine the coefficients of the filter as integers, scaling is performed on the coefficients of the filter, and the scaled coefficients of the filter may be used. When scaling is performed on the coefficients of the filter and the scaled coefficients of the filter are used, thereafter a process of descaling may be performed according to the degree of scaling of the coefficients of the filter. The accuracy of the filter may be 1/32 fractional pixel accuracy.

帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。帧内预测器110可以确定可应用于当前样点的至少一个滤波器候选,并且基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定至少一个滤波器候选中的用于当前样点的滤波器。这里,当前样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是当前样点与位于当前样点的垂直方向上的参考样点之间的距离或者当前样点与位于当前块的水平方向上的参考样点之间的距离,在这种情况下,当前样点与参考样点之间的距离可以对应于当前块中的当前样点的位置坐标值。因此,可以看帧内预测器110基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。The intra predictor 110 may determine a filter for the current sample based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample. The intra predictor 110 may determine at least one filter candidate applicable to the current sample, and determine at least one filter candidate based on at least one of a distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and a size of the current block. Filter candidate for the current sample. Here, the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point may be the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point located in the vertical direction of the current sample point or the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point located in the horizontal direction of the current block. In this case, the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point may correspond to the position coordinate value of the current sample point in the current block. Therefore, it can be seen that the intra predictor 110 determines the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample.

帧内预测单元110可以基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的类型和滤波器的系数。这里,滤波器的类型可以是低通滤波器(low pass filter)、高斯滤波器(Gaussian filter)、双边滤波器(bilateral filter)、均匀滤波器(uniform filter)、双线性插值滤波器(bilinearinterpolation filter)、三次滤波器(cubic filter)、[1 2 1]滤波器和离散余弦变换(Discrete Cosine Transform;DCT)滤波器(DCT filter)之一。这里,离散余弦变换滤波器可以是用于补偿色度分量的子像素运动的4-抽头离散余弦变换插值滤波器(DCTinterpolation filter;DCT-IF)。另外,可以通过组合两个或更多个滤波器来产生新的滤波器,并且可以添加新创建的滤波器作为滤波器类型,另外,不限于上面列出的滤波器的类型,各种类型的滤波器可以是用于当前样点的滤波器的类型。The intra prediction unit 110 may determine a type of filter and a coefficient of the filter for the current sample based on at least one of a distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and a size of the current block. Here, the type of filter can be low pass filter, Gaussian filter, bilateral filter, uniform filter, bilinear interpolation filter filter), cubic filter (cubic filter), [1 2 1] filter and discrete cosine transform (Discrete Cosine Transform; DCT) filter (DCT filter). Here, the discrete cosine transform filter may be a 4-tap discrete cosine transform interpolation filter (DCT interpolation filter; DCT-IF) for compensating for sub-pixel motion of the chroma component. In addition, a new filter can be produced by combining two or more filters, and a newly created filter can be added as a filter type. In addition, not limited to the types of filters listed above, various types of The filter may be the type of filter used for the current sample.

用于当前样点的滤波器的抽头的数量可以是预定的值。这里,预定的值可以是4,即,用于当前样点的滤波器可以是4抽头滤波器,然而不限于此,预定的值可以是1或更大,优选是2或更大的各种整数值之一。The number of taps of the filter for the current sample may be a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value may be 4, that is, the filter used for the current sample point may be a 4-tap filter, but it is not limited thereto, and the predetermined value may be 1 or greater, preferably 2 or greater. One of the integer values.

另外,用于当前样点的滤波器的抽头的数量可以基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定。例如,当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离小于预定的值时,帧内预测器110可以将滤波器的抽头的数量确定为预定的第一抽头的数量。当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离大于预定的值时,帧内预测器110可以将滤波器的抽头的数量确定为预定的第二抽头的数量。这里,预定的第一抽头的数量可以小于预定的第二抽头的数量。Also, the number of taps of the filter for the current sample may be determined based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample and the size of the current block. For example, when the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is smaller than a predetermined value, the intra predictor 110 may determine the number of taps of the filter as the predetermined number of first taps. When the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than a predetermined value, the intra predictor 110 may determine the number of taps of the filter as a predetermined second number of taps. Here, the predetermined number of first taps may be smaller than the predetermined number of second taps.

帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前块中的至少一个样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器。换句话说,用于当前块的多个滤波器可以包括可以用于当前样点的至少一个滤波器候选。The intra predictor 110 may determine a plurality of filters for the current block based on at least one of a size of the current block and a distance between at least one sample in the current block and a reference sample. In other words, the plurality of filters for the current block may include at least one filter candidate that may be used for the current sample.

帧内预测器110可以在用于当前块的多个滤波器中确定与当前样点相对应的滤波器。这里,帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的尺寸(高度或宽度)和当前块中的至少一个样点之间的距离的比率和在当前块中的当前样点的位置(或当前样点与参考样点之间的距离)来在用于当前块的多个滤波器中确定与当前样点相对应的滤波器。The intra predictor 110 may determine a filter corresponding to a current sample among a plurality of filters for the current block. Here, the intra predictor 110 may be based on the ratio of the size (height or width) of the current block to the distance between at least one sample in the current block and the position of the current sample in the current block (or the distance between the current sample and A distance between samples is referred to) to determine a filter corresponding to a current sample among a plurality of filters for the current block.

帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的帧内预测模式来确定与当前块中的样点相对应的第一参考样点。例如,帧内预测器110可以在参考样点中将与从当前样点的根据当前块的帧内预测模式的帧内预测方向的延长线交叉的参考样点确定为第一参考样点。帧内预测器110可以基于样点与第一参考样点之间的距离来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器。帧内预测器110可以在用于当前块的多个滤波器中确定与当前样点相对应的滤波器。The intra predictor 110 may determine first reference samples corresponding to samples in the current block based on the intra prediction mode of the current block. For example, the intra predictor 110 may determine, among the reference samples, a reference sample crossing an extension line from the current sample to the intra prediction direction of the intra prediction mode of the current block as the first reference sample. The intra predictor 110 may determine a plurality of filters for a current block based on a distance between a sample and a first reference sample. The intra predictor 110 may determine a filter corresponding to a current sample among a plurality of filters for the current block.

帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的尺寸来确定用于当前块的滤波器的数量,并且确定与滤波器的数量相对应的用于当前块的滤波器。例如,当当前块的高度或宽度小于预定的值时,图像解码装置100可以将用于当前块的滤波器的数量确定为一个。当将用于当前块的滤波器的数量确定为1时,帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前帧内预测模式来确定用于当前块的滤波器。换句话说,帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的尺寸来确定临界值,并且基于当前帧内预测模式与垂直模式和水平模式之间的索引差值来确定帧内预测模式索引差值,并且通过将所确定的帧内预测模式索引差值与临界值进行比较来确定用于当前块的滤波器。The intra predictor 110 may determine the number of filters for the current block based on the size of the current block, and determine the filter for the current block corresponding to the number of filters. For example, when the height or width of the current block is smaller than a predetermined value, the image decoding device 100 may determine the number of filters for the current block as one. When the number of filters for the current block is determined to be 1, the intra predictor 110 may determine the filters for the current block based on the size of the current block and the current intra prediction mode. In other words, the intra predictor 110 may determine the critical value based on the size of the current block, and determine the intra prediction mode index difference based on the index difference between the current intra prediction mode and the vertical mode and the horizontal mode, and A filter for the current block is determined by comparing the determined intra prediction mode index difference with a critical value.

另外,当当前块的帧内预测模式的索引的值为奇数值时,帧内预测器110可以将第一滤波器确定为用于当前块的滤波器,并且当当前块的帧内预测模式的值为偶数时,可以将第二滤波器确定为用于当前块的滤波器。In addition, when the value of the index of the intra prediction mode of the current block is an odd value, the intra predictor 110 may determine the first filter as the filter for the current block, and when the value of the intra prediction mode of the current block When the value is even, the second filter may be determined as the filter for the current block.

帧内预测器110可以基于当前块的尺寸来确定每个滤波器被应用的样点与参照样点之间的距离的范围。例如,当当前块的高度和宽度都大于或等于32时,滤波器f0被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[0,2),并且滤波器f1被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[2,4),并且滤波器f2被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[4,8),并且滤波器f3被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[8,16),并且滤波器f4被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[16,size)。否则当当前块的高度或宽度小于32时,滤波器f0被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[0,1),并且滤波器f1被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[1,2),并且滤波器f2被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[2,3),并且滤波器f3被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[3,4],并且滤波器f4被使用的当前块的样点与参考样点之间的距离可以是[4,size)。The intra predictor 110 may determine a range of distances between samples to which each filter is applied and reference samples based on the size of the current block. For example, when the height and width of the current block are both greater than or equal to 32, the distance between the sample point of the current block where the filter f0 is used and the reference sample point may be [0, 2), and the distance between the sample point of the filter f1 is used The distance between the samples of the current block and the reference samples may be [2, 4), and the distance between the samples of the current block where the filter f2 is used and the reference samples may be [4, 8), and The distance between the samples of the current block where the filter f3 is used and the reference samples may be [8, 16), and the distance between the samples of the current block where the filter f4 is used and the reference samples may be [ 16, size). Otherwise, when the height or width of the current block is less than 32, the distance between the sample point of the current block used by filter f0 and the reference sample point may be [0, 1), and the sample point of the current block used by filter f1 The distance between the point and the reference sample can be [1, 2), and the distance between the sample of the current block where the filter f2 is used and the reference sample can be [2, 3), and the filter f3 is The distance between the samples of the current block used and the reference samples may be [3, 4], and the distance between the samples of the current block used by filter f4 and the reference samples may be [4, size) .

帧内预测器110可以基于当前样点和参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来在用于当前块的滤波器中确定用于当前样点的滤波器。The intra predictor 110 may determine a filter for the current sample among filters for the current block based on at least one of a distance between the current sample and the reference sample and a size of the current block.

帧内预测器110可以进一步基于当前块的帧内预测模式和当前块的形状中的至少一个来确定使用于当前样点的滤波器。The intra predictor 110 may further determine a filter to use for the current sample based on at least one of the intra prediction mode of the current block and the shape of the current block.

例如,当当前块的帧内预测模式是预定的帧内预测模式时,帧内预测器110可以基于当前块中的当前样点和参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。这里,预定的帧内预测模式可以是除DC模式和平面模式之外的角度模式之一。详细地,预定的帧内预测模式可以是在角度模式中除对角线模式之外的其余模式之一。For example, when the intra prediction mode of the current block is a predetermined intra prediction mode, the intra predictor 110 may base on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and the size of the current block to determine the filter to use for the current sample. Here, the predetermined intra prediction mode may be one of angle modes other than DC mode and planar mode. In detail, the predetermined intra prediction mode may be one of the remaining modes in the angle mode except for the diagonal mode.

例如,当当前块的预测模式是水平模式或垂直模式时,帧内预测器110可以在对参考样点不使用任何滤波器(例如,双线性插值滤波器或[1,2,1]参考滤波器等)的情况下执行帧内预测,以便产生当前块的预测样点。当当前块的预测模式是具有45度的倍数的角度的对角线模式时,帧内预测器110可以通过使用[1,2,1]参考样点滤波器来执行帧内预测,以便产生当前块的预测样点。当当前块的预测模式是除所述模式之外的角度模式时,帧内预测器110可以基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。For example, when the prediction mode of the current block is the horizontal mode or the vertical mode, the intra predictor 110 may not use any filter (for example, bilinear interpolation filter or [1, 2, 1] reference filter, etc.) to perform intra prediction in order to generate prediction samples for the current block. When the prediction mode of the current block is a diagonal mode with an angle that is a multiple of 45 degrees, the intra predictor 110 may perform intra prediction by using a [1, 2, 1] reference sample filter in order to generate the current block. Prediction samples for the block. When the prediction mode of the current block is an angle mode other than the above modes, the intra predictor 110 may determine based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and the size of the current block. Determines the filter to use for the current sample.

帧内预测器110可以进一步基于当前块是否是正方形或者矩形,并且基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于所述当前样点的滤波器。The intra predictor 110 may further determine based on whether the current block is a square or a rectangle, and based on at least one of the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point in the current block and the size of the current block to determine the point filter.

另外,帧内预测器110可以进一步基于当前块的高度和宽度的比率,并且基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。In addition, the intra predictor 110 may further determine the current block based on the ratio of the height and width of the current block, and based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and the size of the current block. Sample filter.

当当前块的宽度小于或等于预定的第一值,并且当前块的高度小于或等于预定的第二值时,帧内预测器110可以基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的第一滤波器。另外,当当前块的宽度大于预定的第一值,或者当前块的高度大于预定的第二值时,帧内预测器110可以基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的第二滤波器。When the width of the current block is less than or equal to the predetermined first value, and the height of the current block is less than or equal to the predetermined second value, the intra predictor 110 may be based on the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point in the current block At least one of the distance and the size of the current block is used to determine the first filter for the current sample. In addition, when the width of the current block is greater than a predetermined first value, or the height of the current block is greater than a predetermined second value, the intra predictor 110 may be based on the distance and At least one of the sizes of the current block is used to determine the second filter for the current sample.

当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离小于预定的值,帧内预测器110可以确定用于当前样点的第一滤波器,并且当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离大于预定的值时,帧内预测器110可以确定用于当前样点的第二滤波器。这里,第一滤波器的平滑强度可以小于第二滤波器的平滑强度。When the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is less than a predetermined value, the intra predictor 110 may determine the first filter for the current sample point, and when the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than the predetermined value , the intra predictor 110 may determine a second filter for the current sample. Here, the smoothing strength of the first filter may be smaller than that of the second filter.

帧内预测器110可以获得当前块的预测块,其包括使用所确定的滤波器产生的当前样点的预测样点。The intra predictor 110 may obtain a predicted block of the current block including predicted samples of the current sample generated using the determined filter.

图像解码器115可以基于关于当前块的变换系数的信息来获得当前块的残差块。换句话说,图像解码器115可以基于关于当前块的变换系数的信息执行反量化和逆变换来从比特流获得关于当前块的残差块的残差样点。The image decoder 115 may obtain the residual block of the current block based on the information about the transformation coefficient of the current block. In other words, the image decoder 115 may perform inverse quantization and inverse transformation based on information on the transform coefficient of the current block to obtain residual samples of the residual block of the current block from the bitstream.

图像解码器115可以基于当前块的预测块和当前块的残差块来恢复当前块。图像解码器115可以通过使用当前块的预测块中的预测样点的样点值和当前块的残差块中的残差样点的样点值来产生当前块中的恢复样点,并且可以基于恢复样点产生当前块的恢复块。The image decoder 115 may restore the current block based on the prediction block of the current block and the residual block of the current block. The image decoder 115 may generate the restoration samples in the current block by using the sample values of the prediction samples in the prediction block of the current block and the sample values of the residual samples in the residual block of the current block, and may A recovery block of the current block is generated based on the recovery samples.

同时,图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器,并且从比特流获得指示是否适应地执行帧内预测的标志信息,可以基于标志信息基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定是否确定用于当前样点的滤波器。这里,标志信息是可以按块获得的,尤其是按最大编码单元获得的。另外,可以按帧获得标志信息。Meanwhile, the image decoding device 100 may determine a filter for the current sample based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample, and obtain an indication from the bitstream whether to perform the frame adaptively The flag information of the intra prediction may determine whether to determine the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample based on the flag information. Here, flag information can be obtained by block, especially by maximum coding unit. In addition, flag information can be obtained frame by frame.

另外,图像解码装置100可以获得共同应用于亮度分量和色差分量的标志信息。另外,图像解码装置100可以获得分别应用于亮度分量或者色差分量的标志信息。In addition, the image decoding device 100 can obtain flag information commonly applied to the luminance component and the color difference component. In addition, the image decoding device 100 may obtain flag information respectively applied to the luma component or the color difference component.

图像解码装置100可以确定共同应用于亮度分量和色差分量的滤波器集。另外,图像解码装置100可以确定按分量应用的滤波器集。The image decoding device 100 may determine a filter set commonly applied to the luma component and the color difference component. In addition, the image decoding device 100 may determine a filter set to be applied by components.

另外,图像解码装置100可以在从比特流不获得标志信息的情况下基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定是否确定用于当前样点的滤波器。例如,当当前块的预测模式是预定的帧内预测模式时,图像解码装置100可以通过基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个确定用于当前样点的滤波器来确定适应地执行帧内预测。In addition, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether to determine the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample without obtaining the flag information from the bitstream. device. For example, when the prediction mode of the current block is a predetermined intra prediction mode, the image decoding device 100 may determine the current sample point based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point filter to determine adaptively perform intra prediction.

另外,图像解码装置100可以在从比特流不获得标志信息的情况下通过使用邻近块的信息来基于执行滤波参考样点和滤波器的加权值确定是否适应地执行帧内预测。例如,图像解码装置100可以为当前块的邻近块基于邻近块的尺寸和其邻近块中的第一样点与参考样点之间的距离来确定用于邻近块中的第一样点的滤波器,并且基于邻近块的标志信息确定是否基于至少一个当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器,其中,邻近块的标志信息指示是否基于用于邻近块中的第一样点的滤波器来适应地执行帧内预测。另外,当当前块的尺寸是预定的第一块的尺寸时,图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器,并且基于用于当前样点的滤波器来确定执行帧内预测。当当前块的尺寸是预定的第二块的尺寸时,图像解码装置100可以在不基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的情况下执行现有的帧内预测。In addition, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether to adaptively perform intra prediction based on performing filtering reference samples and a weight value of the filter by using information of adjacent blocks without obtaining flag information from a bitstream. For example, the image decoding apparatus 100 may determine, for a neighboring block of the current block, the filter for the first sample in the neighboring block based on the size of the neighboring block and the distance between the first sample in its neighboring block and the reference sample. filter, and determine whether to determine a filter for the current sample based on at least one of the size of at least one current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample based on the flag information of the adjacent block, wherein the adjacent block The flag information indicates whether intra prediction is adaptively performed based on a filter for a first sample in a neighboring block. In addition, when the size of the current block is the size of the predetermined first block, the image decoding device 100 may determine the current sample point based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point. , and determine to perform intra prediction based on the filter used for the current sample. When the size of the current block is the size of the predetermined second block, the image decoding device 100 may determine the filter for the current sample not based on the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample. Existing intra prediction is performed in the case.

图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器,并且可以通过将基于用于当前样点的帧内预测的编码/解码工具和类似的帧内预测的编码/解码工具彼此组合来执行帧内预测。另外,图像解码装置100可以在多个帧内预测的编码/解码工具之间给出优先级,并且可以根据编码/解码工具之间的优先级来执行帧内预测。换句话说,当使用具有高优先级的编码/解码工具时,可以不使用具有低优先级的编码/解码工具,并且当不使用具有高优先级的编码/解码工具时,可以使用具有低优先级的编码/解码工具。The image decoding device 100 may determine the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample, and may determine the filter for the current sample based on the intra frame for the current sample. A predictive encoding/decoding tool and a similar intra-frame predictive encoding/decoding tool are combined with each other to perform intra-frame prediction. In addition, the image decoding device 100 may give priority among a plurality of intra-predicted encoding/decoding tools, and may perform intra prediction according to the priority among the encoding/decoding tools. In other words, when an encoding/decoding tool with high priority is used, an encoding/decoding tool with low priority may not be used, and when an encoding/decoding tool with high priority is not used, an encoding/decoding tool with low priority may be used Level encoding/decoding tools.

图1b图示根据各种实施例的图像解码方法的流程图。Fig. 1b illustrates a flowchart of an image decoding method according to various embodiments.

在操作S105中,图像解码装置100可以从比特流获得关于当前块的变换系数的信息。In operation S105, the image decoding device 100 may obtain information about a transform coefficient of a current block from a bitstream.

在操作S110中,图像解码装置100可以基于在当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。In operation S110, the image decoding device 100 may determine a filter for the current sample based on at least one of a distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and a size of the current block.

在操作S115中,图像解码装置100可以获得当前块的预测块,其包括通过使用所确定的滤波器产生的当前样点的预测样点。In operation S115, the image decoding device 100 may obtain a predicted block of the current block including predicted samples of the current sample generated by using the determined filter.

在操作S120中,图像解码装置100可以基于关于当前块的变换系数的信息来获得当前块的残差块。In operation S120, the image decoding device 100 may obtain a residual block of the current block based on the information about the transformation coefficient of the current block.

在操作S125中,图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的预测块和残差块来恢复当前块。In operation S125, the image decoding device 100 may restore the current block based on the prediction block and the residual block of the current block.

图1c图示根据各种实施例的图像解码器6000的框图。Fig. 1c illustrates a block diagram of an image decoder 6000 according to various embodiments.

根据各种实施例的图像解码器6000执行由图像解码装置100的图像解码器115对图像数据进行解码时执行的操作。The image decoder 6000 according to various embodiments performs operations performed when image data is decoded by the image decoder 115 of the image decoding device 100 .

参考图1c,熵解码器6150从比特流6050中解析要解码的经编码的图像数据和解码所需要的编码信息。经过编码的图像数据是经过量化的变换系数。反量化器6200和逆变换器6250从量化后的变换系数恢复残差数据。Referring to FIG. 1c , an entropy decoder 6150 parses encoded image data to be decoded and encoding information required for decoding from a bitstream 6050 . The encoded image data are quantized transform coefficients. The inverse quantizer 6200 and the inverse transformer 6250 restore residual data from quantized transform coefficients.

帧内预测器6400按每块执行帧内预测。图1c的帧内预测器6400可以对应于图1A的帧内预测器110。The intra predictor 6400 performs intra prediction per block. The intra predictor 6400 of FIG. 1c may correspond to the intra predictor 110 of FIG. 1A.

帧间预测器6350按块通过使用从恢复画面缓冲器6300获得的参考图像来执行帧间预测。用于当前图像的块的空间域的数据可以通过将由帧内预测器6400或帧间预测器6350产生的用于每个块的预测数据和残差数据相加来恢复,并且去块单元6450和样点自适应偏移执行器6500可以通过对恢复的空间域的数据执行环路滤波来输出滤波后的恢复图像6600。另外,存储在恢复画面缓冲器6300中的恢复图像可以作为参考图像被输出。The inter predictor 6350 performs inter prediction by using a reference image obtained from the restored picture buffer 6300 by block. The data of the spatial domain for the block of the current image may be restored by adding the prediction data and residual data for each block generated by the intra predictor 6400 or the inter predictor 6350, and the deblocking unit 6450 and The sample adaptive offset performer 6500 may output a filtered restored image 6600 by performing in-loop filtering on the restored spatial domain data. Also, the restored image stored in the restored picture buffer 6300 may be output as a reference image.

为让图像解码装置100的解码器(未示出)对图像数据进行解码,可以按块执行根据各种实施例的图像解码器6000的逐步操作。In order for a decoder (not shown) of the image decoding device 100 to decode image data, the stepwise operation of the image decoder 6000 according to various embodiments may be performed block by block.

图1d图示根据实施例的图像解码装置100的框图。FIG. 1d illustrates a block diagram of an image decoding device 100 according to an embodiment.

根据实施例的图像解码装置100可以包括存储器120和连接到存储器120的至少一个处理器125。根据实施例的图像解码装置100的操作可以作为单独的处理器操作,或者可以根据中央处理器的控制来操作。另外,图像解码装置100的存储器120可以存储从外部接收的数据和由处理器产生的数据。图像解码装置100的处理器125可以从比特流获得关于当前块的信息,并且基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器,并且获得包括使用所确定的滤波器产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块,并且基于关于当前块的变换系数的信息来获得当前块的残差块,并且基于当前块的预测块和残差块来恢复当前块。The image decoding device 100 according to an embodiment may include a memory 120 and at least one processor 125 connected to the memory 120 . The operation of the image decoding device 100 according to the embodiment may operate as a separate processor, or may operate under the control of a central processor. In addition, the memory 120 of the image decoding device 100 may store data received from the outside and data generated by the processor. The processor 125 of the image decoding device 100 may obtain information about the current block from the bitstream, and determine the information for the current block based on at least one of the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point in the current block and the size of the current block. and obtaining a prediction block of the current block including a prediction sample of the current sample generated using the determined filter, and obtaining a residual block of the current block based on information about a transform coefficient of the current block, And the current block is restored based on the prediction block and the residual block of the current block.

图2a图示根据各种实施例的图像编码装置的框图。Fig. 2a illustrates a block diagram of an image encoding device according to various embodiments.

根据各种实施例的图像编码装置150可以包括帧内预测器155和图像编码器160。The image encoding device 150 according to various embodiments may include an intra predictor 155 and an image encoder 160 .

帧内预测器155和图像编码器160可以包括至少一个处理器。另外,帧内预测器155和图像编码器160可以包括存储器,其存储将由至少一个处理器执行的指令。由帧内预测器155和图像编码器160之外的硬件实现,或者可以包括帧内预测器155和图像编码器160。The intra predictor 155 and the image encoder 160 may include at least one processor. In addition, the intra predictor 155 and the image encoder 160 may include a memory storing instructions to be executed by at least one processor. Realized by hardware other than the intra predictor 155 and the image encoder 160 , or may include the intra predictor 155 and the image encoder 160 .

帧内预测器155可以基于在当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。The intra predictor 155 may determine a filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and the size of the current block.

帧内预测器155可以产生包括使用用于当前样点的滤波器来产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块。The intra predictor 155 may generate a prediction block of a current block including a prediction sample of a current sample generated using a filter for the current sample.

帧内预测器155可以基于在当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器的类型和滤波器的系数。The intra predictor 155 may determine a type of filter and a coefficient of the filter for the current sample based on at least one of a distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and the size of the current block.

用于当前样点的滤波器的抽头的数可以是预定的值。这里,预定的值可以是4或更大的整数。另外,用于当前样点的滤波器的抽头的数可以基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定。The number of taps of the filter for the current sample may be a predetermined value. Here, the predetermined value may be an integer of 4 or more. Also, the number of taps of the filter for the current sample may be determined based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample and the size of the current block.

帧内预测器155可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前块中的样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器。The intra predictor 155 may determine a plurality of filters for the current block based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the samples in the current block and the reference samples.

帧内预测器155可以在用于当前块的多个滤波器中确定与当前样点相对应的滤波器。The intra predictor 155 may determine a filter corresponding to a current sample among a plurality of filters for the current block.

帧内预测器155可以基于当前块的帧内预测模式来确定与当前块中的样点相对应的第一参考样点。帧内预测器155可以基于所述当前块中的样点与第一参考样点之间的距离来确定用于当前块的多个滤波器。帧内预测器155可以在用于当前块的多个滤波器中确定与当前样点相对应的滤波器。The intra predictor 155 may determine first reference samples corresponding to samples in the current block based on the intra prediction mode of the current block. The intra predictor 155 may determine a plurality of filters for a current block based on a distance between samples in the current block and a first reference sample. The intra predictor 155 may determine a filter corresponding to a current sample among a plurality of filters for the current block.

帧内预测器155可以基于当前块的尺寸来确定用于当前块的滤波器的数量,并且确定与滤波器数量相对应的用于当前块的滤波器,并且帧内预测器155可以基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来在用于当前块的滤波器中确定用于当前样点的滤波器。The intra predictor 155 may determine the number of filters for the current block based on the size of the current block, and determine the filters for the current block corresponding to the filter number, and the intra predictor 155 may determine the number of filters for the current block based on the size of the current block. The filter for the current sample is determined among the filters for the current block by at least one of the distance between the point and the reference sample and the size of the current block.

当当前块的帧内预测模式是预定的帧内预测模式时,帧内预测器155可以基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。When the intra prediction mode of the current block is a predetermined intra prediction mode, the intra predictor 155 may determine based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample in the current block and the size of the current block The filter to use for the current sample.

当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离小于预定的值时,帧内预测器155可以确定用于当前样点的第一滤波器,并且当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离大于预定的值时,帧内预测器110可以确定用于当前样点的第二滤波器。这里,第一滤波器的平滑强度可以小于第二滤波器的平滑强度。When the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is less than a predetermined value, the intra predictor 155 can determine the first filter for the current sample point, and when the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than When is a predetermined value, the intra predictor 110 may determine a second filter for the current sample. Here, the smoothing strength of the first filter may be smaller than that of the second filter.

图像编码器160可以基于当前块的预测块来对关于当前块的变换系数的信息进行编码。换句话说,图像编码器160可以基于当前块的原始块和当前块的预测块来产生当前块的残差块,并且通过将当前块的残差块变换并量化来对关于当前块的变换系数的信息进行编码。图像编码器160可以对关于当前块的预测模式的信息和关于当前块的帧内预测模式的信息进行编码。The image encoder 160 may encode information about transformation coefficients of a current block based on a prediction block of the current block. In other words, the image encoder 160 may generate a residual block of the current block based on the original block of the current block and the prediction block of the current block, and transform the transform coefficient of the current block by transforming and quantizing the residual block of the current block. information is encoded. The image encoder 160 may encode information on the prediction mode of the current block and information on the intra prediction mode of the current block.

图像编码器160可以产生包括关于当前块的变换系数的信息的比特流,并且输出该比特流。The image encoder 160 may generate a bitstream including information on transform coefficients of a current block, and output the bitstream.

图2b是根据各种实施例的图像编码方法的流程图。Fig. 2b is a flowchart of an image encoding method according to various embodiments.

在操作S150中,图像编码装置150可以基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器。In operation S150, the image encoding device 150 may determine a filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample and the size of the current block.

在操作S155中,图像编码装置150可以产生包括使用所确定的滤波器产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块。在操作S160中,图像编码装置150可以基于当前块的预测块来对关于当前块的变换系数的信息进行编码。In operation S155, the image encoding device 150 may generate a predicted block of the current block including prediction samples of the current sample generated using the determined filter. In operation S160, the image encoding device 150 may encode information about the transformation coefficient of the current block based on the prediction block of the current block.

图2c图示根据各种实施例的图像编码器的框图。Fig. 2c illustrates a block diagram of an image encoder according to various embodiments.

根据各种实施例的图像编码器7000执行由图像编码装置150的图像编码器160对图像数据进行解码时执行的操作。The image encoder 7000 according to various embodiments performs operations performed when image data is decoded by the image encoder 160 of the image encoding device 150 .

换句话说,帧内预测器7200按块对当前图像7050执行帧内预测,并且帧间预测器7150按块通过使用每块的当前图像7050和从恢复画面缓冲器7100获得的参考图像来执行帧间预测。In other words, the intra predictor 7200 performs intra prediction on the current image 7050 by block, and the inter predictor 7150 performs frame prediction by using the current image 7050 and the reference image obtained from the restored picture buffer 7100 by block. time forecast.

可以通过将用于从帧内预测器7200或帧间预测器7150输出的每各块的预测数据从用于当前图像7050的编码的块的数据中减去来产生残差数据,并且变换器7250和量化器7300可以通过对残差数据执行变换和量化来输出按块量化的变换系数。图2c的帧内预测器7200可以对应于图2A的帧内预测器155。The residual data may be generated by subtracting the prediction data for each block output from the intra predictor 7200 or the inter predictor 7150 from the data for the encoded block of the current image 7050, and the transformer 7250 The sum quantizer 7300 may output transform coefficients quantized by blocks by performing transform and quantization on residual data. The intra predictor 7200 of FIG. 2c may correspond to the intra predictor 155 of FIG. 2A.

反量化器7450和逆变换器7500可以通过对量化后的变换系数执行反量化和逆变换来恢复空间域的残差数据。可以将恢复的空间域的的残差数据与用于从帧内预测器7200或帧间预测器7150输出的每个块的预测数据相加以被恢复为用于当前图像7050的块的空间域的数据。去块单元7550和样点自适应偏移执行器通过对恢复的空间域的数据执行环路内滤波来产生滤波后的恢复图像。所产生的恢复图像被存储在恢复画面缓冲器7100中。存储在恢复画面缓冲器7100中的恢复图像可以被用作用于另一图像的帧间预测的参考图像。熵编码器7350可以对量化后的变换系数进行熵编码,并且经熵编码的系数可以作为比特流7400被输出。The inverse quantizer 7450 and the inverse transformer 7500 may restore residual data of the spatial domain by performing inverse quantization and inverse transformation on quantized transform coefficients. The restored residual data of the spatial domain may be added to the prediction data for each block output from the intra predictor 7200 or the inter predictor 7150 to be restored as the residual data of the spatial domain for the block of the current image 7050. data. The deblocking unit 7550 and the SAO performer generate a filtered restored image by performing in-loop filtering on the restored spatial domain data. The generated restored image is stored in the restored picture buffer 7100 . A restored image stored in the restored picture buffer 7100 may be used as a reference image for inter prediction of another image. The entropy encoder 7350 may entropy-encode the quantized transform coefficients, and the entropy-encoded coefficients may be output as a bitstream 7400 .

为让根据各种实施例的图像编码器7000被应用于图像编码装置150,可以按块执行根据各种实施例的图像编码器7000的逐步操作。In order for the image encoder 7000 according to various embodiments to be applied to the image encoding device 150, the stepwise operation of the image encoder 7000 according to various embodiments may be performed block by block.

图2d是根据实施例的图像编码装置150的框图。FIG. 2d is a block diagram of an image encoding device 150 according to an embodiment.

根据实施例的图像编码装置150可以包括存储器165和连接到存储器170的至少一个处理器170。根据实施例的图像编码装置150的操作可以作为单独的处理器操作,或者可以根据中央处理器的控制来操作。另外,图像编码装置150的存储器165可以存储从外部接收的数据和由处理器产生的数据。The image encoding device 150 according to an embodiment may include a memory 165 and at least one processor 170 connected to the memory 170 . The operation of the image encoding device 150 according to the embodiment may operate as a separate processor, or may operate according to the control of the central processor. In addition, the memory 165 of the image encoding device 150 may store data received from the outside and data generated by the processor.

图像编码装置150的处理器170可以基于当前块中的当前样点与参考前样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器,并且产生包括使用所确定的滤波器来产生的当前样点的预测样点的当前块的预测块,并且基于当前块的预测块来对关于当前块的变换系数的信息进行编码。The processor 170 of the image encoding device 150 may determine a filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference previous sample and the size of the current block, and generate the filter using The determined filter is used to generate the prediction block of the current block of the prediction sample of the current sample point, and the information about the transformation coefficient of the current block is encoded based on the prediction block of the current block.

在下文中,根据本公开的实施例将详细描述编码单元的划分。Hereinafter, division of coding units will be described in detail according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.

首先,一个画面(Picture)可以被划分为一个或多个条带。一个条带可以是一个或多个最大编码单元(Coding Tree Unit;CTU)的序列。与最大编码单元(CTU)形成对比的概念有最大编码块(Coding Tree Block;CTB)。First, a picture (Picture) can be divided into one or more slices. A slice may be a sequence of one or more largest coding units (Coding Tree Unit; CTU). A concept in contrast to the largest coding unit (CTU) is the largest coding block (Coding Tree Block; CTB).

最大编码块(CTB)是指包括N×N个样点(N是整数)的N×N块。每个颜色分量可以被划分为一个或多个最大编码块。A largest coding block (CTB) refers to an NxN block including NxN samples (N is an integer). Each color component can be divided into one or more maximal coding blocks.

当画面具有三个样点数组(按Y、Cr和Cb分量的样点数组)时,最大编码单元(CTU)是包括亮度样点的最大编码块和与之相对应的色度样点的两个最大编码块、用于对亮度样点和色度样点进行编码的语法结构的单元。当画面是单色画面时,最大编码单元是包括单色样点的最大编码块和用于对单色样点进行编码的语法结构的单元。当画面是由对每个颜色分量分开的颜色平面进行编码的画面时,最大编码单元是包括用于对相应的画面和画面的样点进行编码的语法结构的单元。When a picture has three sample arrays (sample arrays by Y, Cr, and Cb components), the largest coding unit (CTU) is the largest coding block including luma samples and two blocks of corresponding chrominance samples. The largest coding block, the unit of the syntax structure used to encode luma samples and chroma samples. When the picture is a monochrome picture, the LCU is a unit including the largest coding block of a monochrome sample and a syntax structure for encoding the monochrome sample. When a picture is a picture encoded with color planes separated for each color component, the maximum coding unit is a unit including a syntax structure for encoding the corresponding picture and samples of the picture.

一个最大编码块(CTB)可以被划分为包括MxN个样点(M和N是整数)的MxN编码块(coding block)。One maximum coding block (CTB) may be divided into MxN coding blocks (coding blocks) including MxN samples (M and N are integers).

当画面具有按Y、Cr和Cb分量的样点数组时,编码单元(Coding Unit;CU)是包括亮度样点的编码块和与之相对应的色度样点的两个编码块、用于对亮度样点和色度样点进行编码的语法结构。当画面是单色画面时,编码单元是包括单色样点的编码块和用于对单色样点进行编码的语法结构的单元。当画面是由对每个颜色分量分开的颜色平面进行编码的画面时,编码单元是包括相应的图片和用于对该图片的样点进行编码的语法结构的单元。When a picture has an array of samples according to Y, Cr and Cb components, a coding unit (Coding Unit; CU) is a coding block including luma samples and two coding blocks corresponding to chrominance samples, used for Syntax structure for encoding luma and chroma samples. When the picture is a monochrome picture, the coding unit is a unit including a coding block of monochrome samples and a syntax structure for coding the monochrome samples. When a picture is a picture in which color planes separated for each color component are coded, a coding unit is a unit including a corresponding picture and a syntax structure for coding samples of the picture.

如上所述,最大编码块和最大编码单元是彼此区别的概念,并且编码块和编码单元是彼此不同的概念。换句话说,(最大)编码单元是指包括相应的样点的(最大)编码块和包括与之对应的语法结构的数据结构。然而,本领域的普通技术人员可以理解,(最大)编码单元或(最大)编码块指称包括预定的数量的样点的预定的尺寸的块,因此在以下说明书中,最大编码块和最大编码单元,或编码块和编码单元除非另外说明,否则无区别地提及。As described above, the largest coding block and the largest coding unit are concepts different from each other, and the coding block and the coding unit are concepts different from each other. In other words, a (largest) coding unit refers to a (largest) coding block including corresponding samples and a data structure including a syntax structure corresponding thereto. However, those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that a (largest) coding unit or (largest) coding block refers to a block of a predetermined size including a predetermined number of samples, so in the following description, the largest coding block and the largest coding unit , or coding blocks and coding units are referred to without distinction unless otherwise stated.

图像可以被划分为最大编码单元(Coding Tree Unit;CTU)。可以基于从比特流获得的信息来确定最大编码单元的尺寸。最大编码单元的形状可以具有相同尺寸的正方形,然而不限于此。An image may be divided into a largest coding unit (Coding Tree Unit; CTU). The size of the maximum coding unit may be determined based on information obtained from a bitstream. The shape of the maximum coding unit may have the same size as a square, but is not limited thereto.

例如,可以从比特流获得关于亮度编码块的最大尺寸的信息。例如,关于亮度编码块的最大尺寸的信息指示的亮度编码块的最大尺寸可以是16×16、32×32、64×64、128×128和256×256之一。For example, information about the maximum size of a luma-encoded block can be obtained from the bitstream. For example, the maximum size of the luma coding block indicated by the information on the maximum size of the luma coding block may be one of 16×16, 32×32, 64×64, 128×128, and 256×256.

例如,可以从比特流获得关于可被划分为两个的亮度编码块的最大尺寸与亮度块的尺寸之间的差的信息。关于亮度块尺寸的差的信息可以指示亮度最大编码单元和能够被划分为两个的最大亮度编码块之间的尺寸的差。因此,当组合关于从比特流获得的可划分为两个的亮度编码块的最大尺寸的信息和关于亮度块尺寸的差的信息时,可以确定亮度最大编码单元的尺寸。当使用亮度最大编码单元的尺寸时,可以确定色度最大编码单元的尺寸。例如,当根据颜色格式Y:Cb:Cr的比率为4:2:0时,色度块的尺寸可以是亮度块的尺寸的一半,并且类似地,色度最大编码单元的尺寸可以是亮度最大编码单元的一半。For example, information about the difference between the maximum size of a luma encoding block that can be divided into two and the size of a luma block may be obtained from a bitstream. Information about a difference in luma block size may indicate a difference in size between a luma maximum coding unit and a maximum luma coding block capable of being divided into two. Accordingly, the size of a luma maximum coding unit may be determined when combining information on a maximum size of a luma coding block that can be divided into two obtained from a bitstream and information on a difference in luma block size. When the size of the luma largest coding unit is used, the size of the chroma largest coding unit may be determined. For example, when the ratio according to the color format Y:Cb:Cr is 4:2:0, the size of a chroma block may be half the size of a luma block, and similarly, the size of a chroma largest coding unit may be the size of a luma largest half of the coding unit.

根据实施例,从比特流获得关于能够进行二划分(binary split)的亮度编码块的最大尺寸的信息,因此可以可变地确定能够二划分的亮度编码块的最大尺寸。与此不同,可以固定能够进行三划分(ternary split)的亮度编码块的最大尺寸。例如,能够在I条带中进行三划分的亮度编码块的最大尺寸可以是32×32,并且能够在P条带或B条带中进行三划分的亮度编码块的最大尺寸可以是64×64。According to an embodiment, information on the maximum size of a luma encoding block capable of binary splitting is obtained from a bitstream, and thus the maximum size of a luma encoding block capable of binary splitting may be variably determined. In contrast to this, the maximum size of a luma encoding block capable of ternary split may be fixed. For example, the maximum size of a luma coding block capable of three-partitioning in an I slice may be 32×32, and the maximum size of a luma coding block capable of three-partitioning in a P slice or a B slice may be 64×64 .

另外,最大编码单元可以基于从比特流获得的划分形状模式信息来被分层地划分为编码单元。作为划分形状模式信息,可以从比特流获得指示是否进行四划分(quadsplit)的信息、指示是否多元划分的信息、指示划分方向的信息和划分类型的信息中的至少一个。Also, the maximum coding unit may be hierarchically split into coding units based on split shape pattern information obtained from a bitstream. As the division shape mode information, at least one of information indicating whether to perform quadsplit, information indicating whether to perform multiple split, information indicating a direction of division, and information of a division type can be obtained from the bitstream.

例如,指示是否四划分(quad split)的信息可以指示当前编码单元是否被四划分(QUAD_SPLIT)。For example, the information indicating whether to quad split (quad split) may indicate whether the current coding unit is quad split (QUAD_SPLIT).

当当前编码单元不被四划分时,指示是否多元划分当前编码单元的信息可以指示当前编码单元是否不再被划分(NO_SPLIT)还是被二/三划分。When the current coding unit is not split by four, the information indicating whether the current coding unit is multiple-split may indicate whether the current coding unit is no longer split (NO_SPLIT) or split by two/three.

当当前编码单元被二划分或三划分时,划分方向信息指示当前编码单元以水平方向或垂直方向被划分。When the current coding unit is divided into two or three, the split direction information indicates that the current coding unit is split in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction.

当以水平或垂直方向划分当前编码单元时,划分类型信息指示当前编码单元被二或三划分。When the current coding unit is split in a horizontal or vertical direction, the split type information indicates that the current coding unit is split by two or three.

根据划分方向信息和划分类型信息,可以确定当前编码单元的划分模式。当当前编码单元以水平方向被二划分时的划分模式可以被确定为二水平划分(SPLIT_BT_HOR),当以水平方向被三划分时的三水平划分(SPLIT_TT_HOR),当以垂直方向被二划分时的划分模式可以被确定为二垂直划分(SPLIT_BT_VER),并且当以垂直方向被三划分时的划分模式可以被确定为三垂直划分(SPLIT_BT_VER)。According to the division direction information and the division type information, the division mode of the current coding unit can be determined. The division mode when the current coding unit is divided into two in the horizontal direction may be determined as two horizontal divisions (SPLIT_BT_HOR), three horizontal divisions (SPLIT_TT_HOR) when the current coding unit is divided into three in the horizontal direction, and three horizontal divisions (SPLIT_TT_HOR) when it is divided into two in the vertical direction. The division pattern may be determined as two vertical divisions (SPLIT_BT_VER), and the division mode when divided by three in a vertical direction may be determined as three vertical divisions (SPLIT_BT_VER).

图像解码装置100可以在比特流从一个二进制串(binstring)获得划分形式模式信息。由图像解码装置100接收的比特流的形状可以包括固定长度二进制代码(Fixedlength binary code)、一元编码(Unary code)、截断一元编码(Truncated unary code)和预定的二进制代码等。二进制串通过排列二进制数字来指示信息。二进制串可以由至少一个位构成。图像解码装置100可以基于划分规则获得与二进制串对应的划分形式模式信息。图像解码装置100可以基于一个二进制串来确定是否将编码单元四划分、是否不划分或者划分方向和划分类型。The image decoding device 100 can obtain division form mode information from a binary string (binstring) in a bitstream. The shape of the bit stream received by the image decoding device 100 may include fixed length binary code (Fixedlength binary code), unary code (Unary code), truncated unary code (Truncated unary code), predetermined binary code, and the like. Binary strings indicate information by arranging binary digits. A binary string may consist of at least one bit. The image decoding device 100 may obtain division form pattern information corresponding to a binary string based on division rules. The image decoding device 100 may determine whether to divide the coding unit into four, whether not to divide, or a division direction and a division type based on one binary string.

编码单元可以小于或等于最大编码单元。例如,最大编码单元是具有最大尺寸的编码单元,最大编码单元也是编码单元之一。当关于划分形式模式的划分形状模式信息指示不进行划分时,最大编码单元中确定的编码单元具有与最大编码单元的大小相同的大小。当关于最大编码单元的划分形式模式信息指示进行划分时,最大编码单元可以被划分为编码单元。并且,当针对关于编码单元的划分形式模式信息指示进行划分时,编码单元可以划分为其尺寸更小的编码单元。然而,图像的划分不限于此,最大编码单元和编码单元可能不被区别。在图3至图16更加详细地描述编码单元的划分。A coding unit may be smaller than or equal to a maximum coding unit. For example, the largest coding unit is a coding unit having the largest size, and the largest coding unit is also one of the coding units. When the split shape mode information on the split form mode indicates that splitting is not performed, the coding unit determined in the maximum coding unit has the same size as the size of the maximum coding unit. When the split form mode information on the maximum coding unit indicates splitting, the maximum coding unit may be split into coding units. And, when splitting is indicated for the split form mode information on the coding unit, the coding unit may be split into coding units whose size is smaller. However, division of an image is not limited thereto, and a maximum coding unit and a coding unit may not be distinguished. The division of coding units is described in more detail in FIGS. 3 to 16 .

另外,可以从编码单元确定用于预测的一个或多个预测块。预测块可以等于或小于编码单元。另外,可以从编码单元确定用于变换的一个或多个变换块。变换块可以等于或小于编码单元。Also, one or more prediction blocks used for prediction may be determined from the coding unit. A predicted block may be equal to or smaller than a coding unit. Also, one or more transform blocks for transform may be determined from the coding unit. A transform block may be equal to or smaller than a coding unit.

变换块和预测块的形状和尺寸可以彼此不相关。The shapes and sizes of the transform block and the prediction block may not be correlated with each other.

根据另一实施例,编码单元可以通过作为预测块使用编码单元来执行预测。另外,编码单元可以通过作为变换块使用编码单元来执行变换。According to another embodiment, a coding unit may perform prediction by using the coding unit as a prediction block. Also, the coding unit may perform transformation by using the coding unit as a transformation block.

在图3至图16更加详细地描述编码单元的划分。本公开的当前块和邻近块可以指示最大编码单元、编码单元、预测块和变换块中的一个。并且,当前块或当前编码单元为目前被执行解码或编码的块或目前被执行划分的块。邻近块可以是在当前块之前被恢复的块。邻近块可以空间上或时间上与当前块相邻。邻近块可以位于当前块的左下侧、左侧、左上侧、上侧、右上侧、右侧和右下侧中的一个。The division of coding units is described in more detail in FIGS. 3 to 16 . The current block and neighboring blocks of the present disclosure may indicate one of a maximum coding unit, a coding unit, a prediction block, and a transformation block. And, the current block or the current coding unit is a block currently being decoded or coded or a block currently being divided. Neighboring blocks may be restored blocks prior to the current block. Neighboring blocks may be spatially or temporally adjacent to the current block. The neighboring block may be located in one of lower left, left, upper left, upper, upper right, right, and lower right of the current block.

图3根据一实施例图示图像解码装置100划分当前编码单元来确定至少一个编码单元的过程。FIG. 3 illustrates a process in which the image decoding device 100 divides a current coding unit to determine at least one coding unit, according to an embodiment.

块形状可以包括4N×4N、4N×2N、2N×4N、4N×N、N×4N、32N×N、N×32N、16N×N、N×16N、8N×N或N×8N。这里,N可以是正整数。块形状信息为指示编码单元的形状、方向、宽度与高度的比例和尺寸中的至少一个的信息。Block shapes may include 4Nx4N, 4Nx2N, 2Nx4N, 4NxN, Nx4N, 32NxN, Nx32N, 16NxN, Nx16N, 8NxN, or Nx8N. Here, N may be a positive integer. The block shape information is information indicating at least one of a shape, a direction, a width-to-height ratio, and a size of a coding unit.

编码单元的形状可以包括正方形(square)及非正方形(non-square)。当编码单元的宽度和高度的大小相同时(即,当编码单元的块形状为4N×4N时),图像解码装置100可以将编码单元的块形状信息确定为正方形。图像解码装置100可以将编码单元的形状确定为非正方形。The shape of the coding unit may include square and non-square. When the width and height of the coding unit are the same size (ie, when the block shape of the coding unit is 4N×4N), the image decoding device 100 may determine the block shape information of the coding unit as a square. The image decoding device 100 may determine the shape of the coding unit to be non-square.

当编码单元的宽度和高度的大小不同时(即当编码单元的块形状为4N×2N、2N×4N、4N×N、N×4N、32N×N、N×32N、16N×N、N×16N、8N×N或N×8N时),图像解码装置100可以将编码单元的块形状信息确定为非正方形。当编码单元的形状是非正方形时,图像解码装置100可以将编码单元的块形状信息中宽度和高度的比率确定为1:2、2:1、1:4、4:1、1:8、8:1、1:16、16:1、1:32、32:1中的至少一个。并且,基于编码单元的宽度的大小和高度的大小,图像解码装置100可以确定编码单元是水平方向还是垂直方向。并且,基于编码单元的宽度的大小、高度的大小和面积中的至少一个,图像解码装置100可以确定编码单元的大小。When the size of the width and height of the coding unit is different (that is, when the block shape of the coding unit is 4N×2N, 2N×4N, 4N×N, N×4N, 32N×N, N×32N, 16N×N, N× 16N, 8N×N or N×8N), the image decoding device 100 may determine the block shape information of the coding unit as non-square. When the shape of the coding unit is non-square, the image decoding device 100 may determine the ratio of the width to the height in the block shape information of the coding unit as 1:2, 2:1, 1:4, 4:1, 1:8, 8 :1, 1:16, 16:1, 1:32, 32:1 at least one. And, based on the magnitude of the width and the magnitude of the height of the coding unit, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether the coding unit is in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction. And, based on at least one of the size of the width, the size of the height, and the area of the coding unit, the image decoding device 100 may determine the size of the coding unit.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用块形状信息确定编码单元的形状,且可以使用划分形式模式信息来确定编码单元以哪种形式被划分。换句话说,根据由图像解码装置100使用的块形状信息指示哪种块形状可以确定划分形式模式信息指示的编码单元的划分方法。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the shape of the coding unit using block shape information, and may determine in which form the coding unit is split using split form mode information. In other words, the division method of the coding unit indicated by the division form mode information may be determined according to which block shape is indicated by the block shape information used by the image decoding device 100 .

图像解码装置100可以从比特流获得划分形状模式信息。然而,不限于此,并且图像解码设备100和图像编码设备150可以基于块形状信息来确定预先确定的分割形状模式信息。图像解码装置100可以确定对最大编码单元或最小编码单元预先确定的划分形状模式信息。例如,对最大编码单元,图像解码装置100可以将划分形式模式信息确定为四划分(quad split)。并且,对最小编码单元,图像解码装置100可以将划分形式模式信息确定为“不进行划分”。具体地,图像解码装置100可以将最大编码单元的尺寸确定为256×256。图像解码装置100可以将预先确定的划分形状模式信息确定为四划分。四划分为将编码单元的宽度和高度都二等分的划分形式模式。图像解码装置100可以基于划分形状模式信息来从尺寸为256×256的最大编码单元获得尺寸为128×128的编码单元。另外,图像解码装置100可以将最小编码单元的尺寸确定为4x4。图像解码装置100可以获得对最小编码单元指示“不进行划分”的划分形式模式信息。The image decoding device 100 may obtain division shape pattern information from a bitstream. However, it is not limited thereto, and the image decoding device 100 and the image encoding device 150 may determine predetermined division shape pattern information based on block shape information. The image decoding device 100 may determine split shape pattern information predetermined for a maximum coding unit or a minimum coding unit. For example, for the LCU, the image decoding device 100 may determine the split form mode information as a quad split. And, for the minimum coding unit, the image decoding device 100 may determine the division form mode information as "no division". Specifically, the image decoding device 100 may determine the size of the largest coding unit as 256×256. The image decoding device 100 may determine predetermined division shape pattern information as four divisions. The quad partition is a partition form pattern that halves both the width and the height of the coding unit. The image decoding device 100 may obtain a coding unit having a size of 128×128 from a maximum coding unit having a size of 256×256 based on the split shape mode information. In addition, the image decoding device 100 may determine the size of the minimum coding unit as 4x4. The image decoding device 100 may obtain split form mode information indicating "no split" for the minimum coding unit.

根据实施例,图像解码设备100可以使用指示当前编码单元具有正方形形状的块形状信息。例如,图像解码装置100可以根据划分形式模式信息来确定将正方形的编码单元不划分、垂直划分、水平划分还是划分为四个编码单元等。参照图3,当当前编码单元300的块形状信息显示正方形形状时,解码器120可以基于指示不被划分的划分形式模式信息来不划分具有与当前编码单元300相同尺寸的编码单元310a,或者可以确定基于指示预定的划分方式的划分形式模式信息被划分的编码单元310b、310c、310d、310e和310f等。According to an embodiment, the image decoding apparatus 100 may use block shape information indicating that a current coding unit has a square shape. For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether to divide a square coding unit into four coding units, vertically, horizontally, or not, according to the division form mode information. Referring to FIG. 3 , when the block shape information of the current coding unit 300 shows a square shape, the decoder 120 may not split the coding unit 310a having the same size as the current coding unit 300 based on the split form pattern information indicating not to be split, or may Coding units 310 b , 310 c , 310 d , 310 e , and 310 f , etc., which are split based on split form pattern information indicating a predetermined splitting manner are determined.

参照图3,图像解码装置100可以根据一实施例基于指示以垂直方向进行划分的划分形式模式信息,来将当前编码单元300以垂直方向划分而确定两个编码单元310b。图像解码装置100可以基于指示以水平方向进行划分的划分形式模式信息来确定将当前编码单元300以水平方向划分的两个编码单元310c。图像解码装置100可以基于指示编码单元被以垂直方向和水平方向划分的划分形式模式信息来确定以垂直方向和水平方向划分当前编码单元300的四个编码单元310d。根据实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过基于指示编码单元被以垂直方向进行三(ternary)划分的划分形状模式信息来确定以垂直方向划分当前编码单元300的三个编码单元310e。图像解码装置100可以通过基于指示编码单元以水平方向三划分的划分形状模式信息来确定以水平方向划分当前编码单元300的三个编码单元310f。然而,可以用于划分正方形的编码单元的划分形式不应解释为限于上述的形式,而可以包括能够由划分形式模式信息指示的各种形式。在下文中参照各种实施例具体地描述划分正方形的编码单元的预定的划分形式。Referring to FIG. 3 , the image decoding device 100 may divide the current coding unit 300 in a vertical direction to determine two coding units 310 b based on the division form mode information indicating division in the vertical direction according to an embodiment. The image decoding device 100 may determine two coding units 310c to split the current coding unit 300 in the horizontal direction based on the split form pattern information indicating splitting in the horizontal direction. The image decoding device 100 may determine the four coding units 310d in which the current coding unit 300 is split vertically and horizontally based on the split form pattern information indicating that the coding unit is split vertically and horizontally. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine three coding units 310 e in which the current coding unit 300 is vertically split by based on split shape pattern information indicating that the coding unit is vertically split into ternary. The image decoding device 100 may determine the three coding units 310f that divide the current coding unit 300 in the horizontal direction by based on the split shape pattern information indicating that the coding unit is split into three in the horizontal direction. However, division forms that may be used to divide a square coding unit should not be construed as being limited to the above-mentioned forms, but may include various forms that can be indicated by the division form pattern information. A predetermined splitting form of splitting a square coding unit is specifically described below with reference to various embodiments.

图4图示根据一实施例的图像解码装置100划分非正方形形状的编码单元来确定至少一个编码单元的过程。FIG. 4 illustrates a process in which the image decoding device 100 divides non-square-shaped coding units to determine at least one coding unit, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用指示当前编码单元具有非正方形形状的块形状信息。图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息来确定是不划分非正方形的当前编码单元还是以预定的方法划分当前编码单元。参照图4,当当前编码单元400或450的块形状信息指示非正方形形状时,图像解码装置100可以根据指示不进行划分的划分形式模式信息来确定具有与当前编码单元400或450的尺寸相同的尺寸的编码单元410或460,或者可以基于指示预定的划分方法的划分形式模式信息确定被划分的编码单元420a、420b、430a、430b、430c、470a、470b、480a、480b,及480c。在下文中参照各种实施例具体地描述划分非正方形的编码单元的预定的划分方法。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may use block shape information indicating that a current coding unit has a non-square shape. The image decoding device 100 may determine whether to divide the non-square current coding unit or divide the current coding unit in a predetermined method based on the division form mode information. Referring to FIG. 4 , when the block shape information of the current coding unit 400 or 450 indicates a non-square shape, the image decoding device 100 may determine a block having the same size as the current coding unit 400 or 450 according to the division form mode information indicating no division. The size of the coding unit 410 or 460, or the split coding units 420a, 420b, 430a, 430b, 430c, 470a, 470b, 480a, 480b, and 480c may be determined based on split form mode information indicating a predetermined split method. A predetermined division method of dividing a non-square coding unit is specifically described below with reference to various embodiments.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用划分形式模式信息来确定划分编码单元的形式,在这种情况下,划分形式模式信息可以指示通过划分编码单元而生成的至少一个编码单元的数量。参照图4,当划分形式模式信息指示当前编码单元400或450划分为两个编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息来划分当前编码单元400或450而确定在当前编码单元中包括的两个编码单元420a、420b或470a、470b。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine a form of splitting a coding unit using split-form pattern information, and in this case, the split-form pattern information may indicate the number of at least one coding unit generated by splitting the coding unit. Referring to FIG. 4 , when the division form mode information indicates that the current coding unit 400 or 450 is divided into two coding units, the image decoding device 100 may divide the current coding unit 400 or 450 based on the division form mode information to determine that the current coding unit includes The two encoding units 420a, 420b or 470a, 470b of .

根据一实施例,当图像解码装置100基于划分形式模式信息来划分非正方形形状的当前编码单元400或450时,图像解码装置100可以考虑非正方形的当前编码单元400或450的长边的位置来划分当前编码单元。例如,图像解码装置100可以考虑当前编码单元400或450的形状来以划分当前编码单元400或450的长边的方向来划分当前编码单元400或450而确定多个编码单元。According to an embodiment, when the image decoding device 100 divides the non-square current coding unit 400 or 450 based on the division form mode information, the image decoding device 100 may consider the position of the long side of the non-square current coding unit 400 or 450 to determine Divide the current coding unit. For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine a plurality of coding units by dividing the current coding unit 400 or 450 in a direction of dividing a long side of the current coding unit 400 or 450 in consideration of a shape of the current coding unit 400 or 450 .

根据一实施例,当划分形式模式信息指示将编码单元划分(三划分:ternarysplit)成奇数个块时,图像解码装置100可以确定在当前编码单元400或450中包括的奇数个编码单元。例如,当划分形式模式信息指示将当前编码单元400或450划分为三个编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以将当前编码单元400或450划分为三个编码单元430a、430b及430c或480a、480b、480c。According to an embodiment, when the split form mode information indicates that the coding unit is split (ternary split) into an odd number of blocks, the image decoding device 100 may determine an odd number of coding units included in the current coding unit 400 or 450 . For example, when the division mode information indicates that the current coding unit 400 or 450 is divided into three coding units, the image decoding device 100 may divide the current coding unit 400 or 450 into three coding units 430a, 430b and 430c or 480a, 480b , 480c.

根据一实施例,当前编码单元400或450的宽度与高度的比例可以为4:1或者1:4。当宽度与高度的比例为4:1时,由于宽度的大小大于高度的大小,块形状信息可以为水平方向。当宽度与高度的比例为1:4时,由于宽度的大小短于高度的大小,块形状信息可以为垂直方向。图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息来确定将当前编码单元划分为奇数个块。并且,图像解码装置100可以基于当前编码单元400或450的块形状信息来确定当前编码单元400或450的划分方向。例如,当当前编码单元400为垂直方向时,图像解码装置100可以通过将当前编码单元400以水平方向划分来确定编码单元430a、430b及430c。另外,当当前编码单元450为水平方向时,图像解码装置100可以通过将当前编码单元以垂直方向划分来确定编码单元480a、480b及480c。According to an embodiment, the ratio of the width to the height of the current coding unit 400 or 450 may be 4:1 or 1:4. When the ratio of the width to the height is 4:1, since the width is greater than the height, the block shape information may be in the horizontal direction. When the ratio of the width to the height is 1:4, since the size of the width is shorter than the size of the height, the block shape information may be in the vertical direction. The image decoding device 100 may determine to split the current coding unit into an odd number of blocks based on the split form mode information. And, the image decoding device 100 may determine a splitting direction of the current coding unit 400 or 450 based on the block shape information of the current coding unit 400 or 450 . For example, when the current coding unit 400 is in the vertical direction, the image decoding device 100 may determine the coding units 430a, 430b, and 430c by dividing the current coding unit 400 in the horizontal direction. In addition, when the current coding unit 450 is in the horizontal direction, the image decoding device 100 may determine the coding units 480a, 480b, and 480c by dividing the current coding unit in the vertical direction.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以确定在当前编码单元400或450中包括的奇数个编码单元,所确定的编码单元的尺寸不一定相同。例如,所确定的奇数个的编码单元430a、430b、430c、480a、480b及480c中预定的编码单元430b或480b的尺寸可以与其他编码单元430a、430c、480a及480c的尺寸不同。换言之,可以通过划分当前编码单元400或450而确定的编码单元可以具有多个类型的尺寸,根据情况,奇数个编码单元430a、430b、430c、480a、480b及480c各自可以具有不同的尺寸。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine an odd number of coding units included in the current coding unit 400 or 450 , and the sizes of the determined coding units are not necessarily the same. For example, the size of the predetermined coding unit 430b or 480b among the determined odd coding units 430a, 430b, 430c, 480a, 480b and 480c may be different from the size of other coding units 430a, 430c, 480a and 480c. In other words, a coding unit that may be determined by splitting the current coding unit 400 or 450 may have multiple types of sizes, and each of the odd coding units 430a, 430b, 430c, 480a, 480b, and 480c may have a different size according to circumstances.

根据一实施例,当划分形式模式信息指示编码单元被划分为奇数个块时,图像解码装置100可以确定在当前编码单元400或450中包括的奇数个的编码单元,进而,图像解码装置100可以对在通过划分而生成的奇数个编码单元中的至少一个编码单元实施预定的限制。参照图4,图像解码装置100可以使对通过划分当前编码单元400或450来生成的三个编码单元430a、430b及430c或480a、480b及480c中位于中央的编码单元430b和480b的解码过程与对其他编码单元430a、430c、480a,及480c的解码过程不同。例如,与其他编码单元430a、430c、480a及480c不同,图像解码装置100可以限制位于中央的编码单元430b和480b不再被划分或只以预定的次数划分。According to an embodiment, when the division form mode information indicates that the coding unit is divided into an odd number of blocks, the image decoding device 100 may determine an odd number of coding units included in the current coding unit 400 or 450, and further, the image decoding device 100 may A predetermined restriction is imposed on at least one coding unit among the odd coding units generated by the split. Referring to FIG. 4 , the image decoding device 100 may make the decoding process of the centrally located coding units 430b and 480b among the three coding units 430a, 430b, and 430c or 480a, 480b, and 480c generated by dividing the current coding unit 400 or 450 be the same as The decoding process for other coding units 430a, 430c, 480a, and 480c is different. For example, unlike the other coding units 430a, 430c, 480a, and 480c, the image decoding device 100 may restrict the centrally located coding units 430b and 480b from being divided any more or only a predetermined number of times.

图5图示根据一实施例的图像解码装置100基于块形状信息和划分形式模式信息中的至少一个来划分编码单元的过程。FIG. 5 illustrates a process in which the image decoding device 100 splits a coding unit based on at least one of block shape information and split form mode information according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于块形状信息和划分形式模式信息中的至少一个确定将正方形的第一编码单元500划分为多个编码单元或确定不进行划分。根据一实施例,当划分形式模式信息指示以水平方向划分第一编码单元500时,图像解码装置100可以通过将第一编码单元500以水平方向划分来确定第二编码单元510。根据一实施例所使用的第一编码单元、第二编码单元及第三编码单元是为了理解编码单元之间的划分前后关系而使用的术语。例如,可以通过划分第一编码单元来确定第二编码单元,可以通过划分第二编码单元来确定第三编码单元。在下文中,可以理解所使用的第一编码单元、第二编码单元与第三编码单元之间的关系基于上述的特点。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine to divide the square-shaped first coding unit 500 into a plurality of coding units or determine not to divide based on at least one of the block shape information and the division form mode information. According to an embodiment, when the division form mode information indicates that the first coding unit 500 is divided in the horizontal direction, the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding unit 510 by dividing the first coding unit 500 in the horizontal direction. The first coding unit, the second coding unit, and the third coding unit used according to an embodiment are terms used for understanding the division context between coding units. For example, the second coding unit may be determined by dividing the first coding unit, and the third coding unit may be determined by dividing the second coding unit. In the following, it can be understood that the relationship among the first coding unit, the second coding unit and the third coding unit used is based on the above characteristics.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息确定将所确定的第二编码单元510划分为多个编码单元或确定不进行划分。参照图5,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息将通过划分第一编码单元500而确定的非正方形形状的第二编码单元510划分为至少一个第三编码单元520a、520b、520c及520d等或不划分第二编码单元510。图像解码装置100可以获得划分形式模式信息,并且可以基于所获得的划分形式模式信息来将第一编码单元500划分为各种形式的多个第二编码单元(例如,510),而且,第二编码单元510是可以基于划分形式模式信息根据第一编码单元500被划分的方式来被划分的。根据一实施例,当第一编码单元500基于关于第一编码单元500的划分形式模式信息而被划分为第二编码单元510时,第二编码单元510也可以基于关于第二编码单元510的划分形式模式信息而被划分为第三编码单元(例如,520a、520b、520c及520d等)。换言之,编码单元可以基于与各编码单元有关的划分形式模式信息被递归地划分。因此,可以在非正方形形状的编码单元中确定正方形的编码单元,也可以通过递归地划分该正方形形状的编码单元来确定非正方形形状的编码单元。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine to divide the determined second coding unit 510 into a plurality of coding units or determine not to divide based on the division form mode information. Referring to FIG. 5 , the image decoding device 100 may divide the non-square-shaped second coding unit 510 determined by dividing the first coding unit 500 into at least one third coding unit 520a, 520b, 520c, and 520d, etc., based on the division form mode information. Or the second coding unit 510 is not divided. The image decoding device 100 may obtain split form mode information, and may divide the first coding unit 500 into a plurality of second coding units (for example, 510) of various forms based on the obtained split form mode information, and the second The coding unit 510 may be split according to the manner in which the first coding unit 500 is split based on the split form mode information. According to an embodiment, when the first coding unit 500 is divided into the second coding unit 510 based on the division mode information about the first coding unit 500 , the second coding unit 510 may also be based on the division of the second coding unit 510 The format mode information is divided into third coding units (eg, 520a, 520b, 520c, and 520d, etc.). In other words, coding units may be recursively split based on split form pattern information related to each coding unit. Therefore, the square coding unit may be determined among the non-square-shaped coding units, and the non-square-shaped coding unit may also be determined by recursively dividing the square-shaped coding unit.

参照图5,在通过划分非正方形形状的第二编码单元510来被确定的奇数个的第三编码单元520b、520c及520d中的预定的编码单元(例如,位于中央的编码单元或正方形形状的编码单元)可以被递归地划分。根据一实施例,作为奇数个第三编码单元520b、520c及520d中的一个的正方形的第三编码单元520b可以被以水平方向划分且被划分为多个第四编码单元。多个第四编码单元530a、530b、530c及530d中的一个的非正方形形状的第四编码单元530b或530d可以再被划分为多个编码单元。例如,非正方形的第四编码单元530b或530d可以再被划分为奇数个编码单元。稍后通过各种实施例描述可以用于递归地划分编码单元的方法。Referring to FIG. 5 , predetermined coding units (for example, centrally located coding units or square-shaped coding units) among odd-numbered third coding units 520b, 520c, and 520d determined by dividing a non-square-shaped second coding unit 510 coding unit) can be recursively divided. According to an embodiment, the square third coding unit 520b, which is one of the odd number of third coding units 520b, 520c, and 520d, may be divided in a horizontal direction and divided into a plurality of fourth coding units. The non-square-shaped fourth coding unit 530b or 530d of one of the plurality of fourth coding units 530a, 530b, 530c, and 530d may be further divided into a plurality of coding units. For example, the non-square fourth coding unit 530b or 530d may be further divided into an odd number of coding units. A method that may be used to recursively divide a coding unit is described later through various embodiments.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息来将第三编码单元520a、520b、520c及520d分别划分为多个编码单元。并且,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息来确定不划分第二编码单元510。图像解码装置100可以根据一实施例将非正方形形状的第二编码单元510划分为奇数个第三编码单元520b、520c及520d。图像解码装置100可以对在奇数个的第三编码单元520b、520c及520d中的预定数量的第三编码单元实施预定的限制。例如,图像解码装置100可以将在奇数个的第三编码单元520b、520c及520d中的位于中央的编码单元520c限制为不再被划分或可以被划分可设定的次数。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the third coding units 520 a , 520 b , 520 c , and 520 d into a plurality of coding units, respectively, based on the division form mode information. And, the image decoding device 100 may determine not to split the second coding unit 510 based on the split form mode information. The image decoding device 100 may divide the non-square second coding unit 510 into an odd number of third coding units 520b, 520c, and 520d according to an embodiment. The image decoding device 100 may implement a predetermined restriction on a predetermined number of third coding units among the odd-numbered third coding units 520b, 520c, and 520d. For example, the image decoding device 100 may limit the centrally located coding unit 520c among the odd-numbered third coding units 520b, 520c, and 520d to be no longer divided or may be divided a configurable number of times.

参照图5,图像解码装置100可以限制在非正方形形状的第二编码单元510中包括的奇数个的第三编码单元520b、520c及520d中的位于中央的编码单元520c不再被划分,限制划分形式(例如,仅被划分为四个编码单元或以与第二编码单元510被划分的形式对应的形式被划分),或限制进行划分的次数(例如,仅进行划分n次,n>0)。然而,对位于中央的编码单元520c的所述限制仅仅是单纯的实施例,不应被解释为限于上述的实施例,应解释为包括位于中央的编码单元520c能够被解码成与其他编码单元520b和520d不同的各种限制。Referring to FIG. 5 , the image decoding device 100 may restrict the centrally located coding unit 520c among the odd-numbered third coding units 520b, 520c, and 520d included in the non-square-shaped second coding unit 510 from being divided any more, restricting the division. form (for example, only be divided into four coding units or be divided in a form corresponding to the form in which the second coding unit 510 is divided), or limit the number of divisions (for example, only divide n times, n>0) . However, the restriction on the centrally located encoding unit 520c is merely an example, and should not be construed as being limited to the above-described embodiments, but should be interpreted as including that the centrally located encoding unit 520c can be decoded to be compatible with other encoding units 520b Various restrictions different from 520d.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以从当前编码单元内的预定的位置获得用于划分当前编码单元的划分形式模式信息。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may obtain division form mode information for dividing the current coding unit from a predetermined position within the current coding unit.

图6图示根据一实施例的图像解码装置100从奇数个的编码单元中确定预定的编码单元的方法。FIG. 6 illustrates a method of determining a predetermined coding unit from an odd number of coding units by the image decoding device 100 according to an embodiment.

参照图6,当前编码单元600和650的划分形式模式信息可以是从在当前编码单元600和650中包括的多个样点中位于预定位置的样点(例如,位于中央的样点640和690)获得的。然而,可以获得这种划分形式模式信息中至少一个的当前编码单元600内的预定位置不应被限制性地解释为在图6中所示的中央位置,而预定位置可以解释为包括可以包括在当前编码单元600内的各种位置(例如,最上端、最下端、左侧、右侧、左侧上端、左侧下端、右侧上端或右侧下端等)。图像解码装置100可以获得从预定位置获得的划分形式模式信息来确定将当前编码单元划分为各种形状和尺寸的编码单元或确定不进行划分。Referring to FIG. 6 , the division form mode information of the current coding units 600 and 650 may be samples located at predetermined positions (for example, samples 640 and 690 located at the center) among a plurality of samples included in the current coding units 600 and 650. )acquired. However, the predetermined position within the current coding unit 600 where at least one of such division form mode information can be obtained should not be limitedly interpreted as the central position shown in FIG. Various positions within the current coding unit 600 (eg, uppermost, lowermost, left, right, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right, etc.). The image decoding device 100 may obtain split form mode information obtained from a predetermined location to determine to split the current coding unit into coding units of various shapes and sizes or to determine not to split.

根据一实施例,当当前编码单元被划分为预定数量的编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以选择其中一个编码单元。可以存在从多个编码单元中选择一个的各种方法,参照以下的各种实施例稍后描述这些各种方法。According to an embodiment, when the current coding unit is divided into a predetermined number of coding units, the image decoding device 100 may select one of the coding units. There may be various methods of selecting one from a plurality of coding units, which are described later with reference to various embodiments below.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将当前编码单元划分为多个编码单元并确定预定位置的编码单元。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide a current coding unit into a plurality of coding units and determine a coding unit at a predetermined location.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用指示奇数个编码单元各自的位置的信息以确定在奇数个编码单元中的位于中央的编码单元。参照图6,图像解码装置100可以划分当前编码单元600或当前编码单元650来确定奇数个的编码单元620a、620b及620c或奇数个的编码单元660a、660b及660c。图像解码装置100可以使用关于奇数个的编码单元620a、620b及620c或奇数个的编码单元660a、660b及660c的位置的信息来确定中央编码单元620b或中央编码单元660b。例如,图像解码装置100可以基于指示在编码单元620a、620b及620c中包括的预定样点的位置的信息来确定编码单元620a、620b及620c的位置以确定位于中央的编码单元620b。具体地,图像解码装置100可以基于指示编码单元620a、620b及620c的左侧上端的样点630a、630b及630c的位置的信息来确定编码单元620a、620b及620c的位置以确定位于中央的编码单元620b。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may use information indicating respective positions of odd coding units to determine a centrally located coding unit among the odd coding units. Referring to FIG. 6 , the image decoding device 100 may divide the current coding unit 600 or the current coding unit 650 to determine an odd number of coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c or an odd number of coding units 660a, 660b, and 660c. The image decoding device 100 may determine the central coding unit 620b or the central coding unit 660b using information on the positions of the odd coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c or the odd coding units 660a, 660b, and 660c. For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine positions of the encoding units 620a, 620b, and 620c based on information indicating positions of predetermined samples included in the encoding units 620a, 620b, and 620c to determine the centrally located encoding unit 620b. Specifically, the image decoding device 100 may determine the positions of the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c based on the information indicating the positions of the samples 630a, 630b, and 630c at the left upper ends of the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c to determine the centrally located coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c. Unit 620b.

根据一实施例,指示分别包括在编码单元620a、620b及620c中的左侧上端的样点630a、630b及630c的位置的信息可以包括关于编码单元620a、620b及620c在画面内的位置或坐标的信息。根据一实施例,指示分别包括在编码单元620a、620b及620c中的左侧上端的样点630a、630b及630c的位置的信息可以包括指示在当前编码单元600中包括的编码单元620a、620b及620c的宽度或高度的信息,该宽度或高度可以相当于指示编码单元620a、620b及620c在画面内的坐标之间的差的信息。也就是说,图像解码装置100可以直接使用关于编码单元620a、620b及620c在画面内的位置或坐标的信息或使用关于与坐标之间的差值对应的编码单元的宽度或高度的信息来确定位于中央的编码单元620b。According to an embodiment, the information indicating the positions of the upper left samples 630a, 630b, and 630c respectively included in the encoding units 620a, 620b, and 620c may include information about the positions or coordinates of the encoding units 620a, 620b, and 620c within the picture. Information. According to an embodiment, the information indicating the positions of the samples 630a, 630b, and 630c at the upper left end respectively included in the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c may include indicating the coding units 620a, 620b, and Information about the width or height of 620c, which may be equivalent to information indicating the difference between the coordinates of the encoding units 620a, 620b, and 620c within the frame. That is, the image decoding device 100 may directly use information about the positions or coordinates of the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c within the screen or use information about the width or height of the coding units corresponding to the difference between the coordinates to determine The centrally located encoding unit 620b.

根据一实施例,指示上端编码单元620a的左侧上端的样点630a的位置的信息可以指示(xa,ya)坐标,指示中央编码单元620b的左侧上端的样点630b的位置的信息可以指示(xb,yb)坐标,指示下端编码单元620c的左侧上端的样点630c的位置的信息可以指示(xc,yc)坐标。图像解码装置100可以使用分别在编码单元620a、620b及620c中包括的左侧上端的样点630a、630b及630c的坐标来确定中央编码单元620b。例如,将左侧上端的样点630a、630b及630c的坐标按照升序或降序排列,可以将包括位于中央的样点630b的坐标(即,(xb,yb))的编码单元620b确定为在通过划分当前编码单元600来确定的编码单元620a、620b及620c中的位于中央的编码单元。然而,指示左侧上端的样点630a、630b及630c的位置的坐标可以是指指示在画面内的绝对位置的坐标,进而,可以使用作为指示中央编码单元620b的左侧上端的样点630b相对于上端编码单元620a的左侧上端的样点630a的位置的相对位置的信息的(dxb,dyb)坐标和作为指示下端编码单元620c的左侧上端的样点630c相对于上端编码单元620a的左侧上端的样点630a的位置的相对位置的信息的(dxc,dyc)坐标。并且,通过将指示在编码单元中包括的样点的位置的信息用作该样点的坐标来确定预定位置的编码单元的方法不应被解释为限于上述的方法,而应被解释为可以使用样点的坐标的各种算术性方法。According to an embodiment, the information indicating the position of the sample point 630a at the upper left end of the upper encoding unit 620a may indicate (xa, ya) coordinates, and the information indicating the position of the sample point 630b at the upper left end of the central encoding unit 620b may indicate (xb, yb) coordinates, the information indicating the position of the sample point 630c at the left upper end of the lower encoding unit 620c may indicate (xc, yc) coordinates. The image decoding device 100 may determine the central coding unit 620b using coordinates of upper left samples 630a, 630b, and 630c included in the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c, respectively. For example, by arranging the coordinates of the sample points 630a, 630b, and 630c at the upper left end in ascending or descending order, the encoding unit 620b including the coordinates (ie (xb, yb)) of the sample point 630b located in the center may be determined to be the A centrally located CU among the CUs 620 a , 620 b , and 620 c determined by dividing the current CU 600 . However, the coordinates indicating the positions of the samples 630a, 630b, and 630c at the upper left end may refer to coordinates indicating an absolute position within the screen, and further, the sample point 630b which indicates the upper left end of the central encoding unit 620b may be used relative to The (dxb, dyb) coordinates of the information of the relative position of the sample point 630a on the left upper end of the upper end encoding unit 620a and the left upper end sample point 630c indicating the left upper end of the lower end encoding unit 620c relative to the left side of the upper end encoding unit 620a (dxc, dyc) coordinates of the relative position information of the sample point 630a at the upper end of the side. And, a method of determining a coding unit of a predetermined position by using information indicating a position of a sample included in the coding unit as the coordinates of the sample should not be construed as being limited to the above-mentioned method, but can be interpreted as using Various arithmetic methods for the coordinates of sample points.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将当前编码单元600划分为多个编码单元620a、620b及620c,且可以从编码单元620a、620b及620c中根据预定标准确定编码单元。例如,图像解码装置100可以从编码单元620a、620b及620c中选择具有不同尺寸的编码单元620b。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the current coding unit 600 into a plurality of coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c, and may determine the coding units from the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c according to a predetermined standard. For example, the image decoding device 100 may select a coding unit 620b having a different size from among the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用作为指示上端编码单元620a的左侧上端的样点630a的位置的信息的(xa,ya)坐标、作为指示中央编码单元620b的左侧上端的样点630b的位置的信息的(xb,yb)坐标)及作为指示下端编码单元620c的左侧上端的样点630c的位置的信息的(xc,yc)坐标来确定各个编码单元620a、620b及620c的宽度和高度。图像解码装置100可以使用指示编码单元620a、620b及620c的位置的坐标(xa,ya)、(xb,yb)及(xc,yc)来确定编码单元620a、620b及620c各自的尺寸。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将上端编码单元620a的宽度确定为当前编码单元600的宽度。图像解码装置100可以将上端编码单元620a的高度确定为yb-ya。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将中央编码单元620b的宽度确定为当前编码单元600的宽度。图像解码装置100可以将中央编码单元620b的高度确定为yc-yb。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用当前编码单元的宽度或高度和上端编码单元620a及中央编码单元620b的宽度和高度来确定下端编码单元的宽度或高度。图像解码装置100可以基于所确定的编码单元620a、620b及620c的宽度和高度来确定具有与其他编码单元的尺寸不同的尺寸的编码单元。参照图6,图像解码装置100可以将具有与上端编码单元620a和下端编码单元620c的尺寸不同的尺寸的中央编码单元620b确定为处于预定位置的编码单元。然而,所述的图像解码装置100确定具有与其他编码单元的尺寸不同的尺寸的过程仅为使用基于样点坐标确定的编码单元的尺寸确定预定位置的编码单元的一个实施例,因此可以使用将根据预定的样点坐标确定的编码单元的尺寸进行比较来确定预定位置的编码单元的各种过程。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may use (xa, ya) coordinates as information indicating the position of the sample point 630a at the upper left end of the upper encoding unit 620a as the sample point indicating the upper left end of the central encoding unit 620b. The (xb, yb) coordinates of the information on the position of 630b) and the (xc, yc) coordinates of the information indicating the position of the sample point 630c at the left upper end of the lower end encoding unit 620c are used to determine the respective encoding units 620a, 620b, and 620c. width and height. The image decoding device 100 may determine respective sizes of the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c using coordinates (xa, ya), (xb, yb), and (xc, yc) indicating locations of the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the width of the upper coding unit 620 a as the width of the current coding unit 600 . The image decoding device 100 may determine the height of the upper coding unit 620a as yb-ya. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the width of the central coding unit 620 b as the width of the current coding unit 600 . The image decoding device 100 may determine the height of the central coding unit 620b as yc-yb. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may use the width or height of the current CU and the width and height of the upper CU 620a and the central CU 620b to determine the width or height of the lower CU. The image decoding device 100 may determine a coding unit having a size different from that of other coding units based on the determined width and height of the coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c. Referring to FIG. 6 , the image decoding device 100 may determine a central coding unit 620b having a size different from that of an upper coding unit 620a and a lower coding unit 620c as a coding unit at a predetermined position. However, the process of the image decoding device 100 determining a size different from that of other coding units is only an embodiment of determining a coding unit at a predetermined position using the size of the coding unit determined based on the sample point coordinates, so the Various processes for determining the coding unit at the predetermined position by comparing the size of the coding unit determined according to the predetermined sample point coordinates.

图像解码装置100可以使用作为指示左侧编码单元660a的左侧上端的样点670a的位置的信息的(xd,yd)坐标)、作为指示中央编码单元660b的左侧上端的样点670b的位置的信息的(xe,ye)坐标及作为指示右侧编码单元660c的左侧上端的样点670c的位置的信息的(xf,yf)坐标来确定编码单元660a、660b及660c各自的宽度或高度。图像解码装置100可以使用作为指示编码单元660a、660b及660c的位置的坐标的(xd,yd)、(xe,ye)及(xf,yf)来确定各编码单元660a、660b,及660c的尺寸。The image decoding device 100 may use (xd, yd) coordinates) as information indicating the position of the sample point 670a at the left upper end of the left encoding unit 660a, as the position of the sample point 670b indicating the left upper end of the central encoding unit 660b The (xe, ye) coordinates of the information and the (xf, yf) coordinates as information indicating the position of the sample point 670c at the left upper end of the right encoding unit 660c determine the respective widths or heights of the encoding units 660a, 660b, and 660c . The image decoding device 100 may determine the size of each coding unit 660a, 660b, and 660c using (xd, yd), (xe, ye), and (xf, yf), which are coordinates indicating positions of the coding units 660a, 660b, and 660c .

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将左侧编码单元660a的宽度确定为xe-xd。图像解码装置100可以将左侧编码单元660a的高度确定为当前编码单元650的高度。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将中央编码单元660b的宽度确定为xf-xe。图像解码装置100可以将中央编码单元660b的高度确定为当前编码单元600的高度。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用当前编码单元650的宽度或高度和左侧编码单元660a和中央编码单元660b的宽度和高度来确定右侧编码单元660c的宽度或高度。图像解码装置100可以基于所确定的编码单元660a、660b及660c的宽度和高度来确定具有与其他编码单元的尺寸不同的尺寸的编码单元。参照图6,图像解码装置100可以将中央编码单元660b确定为预定位置的编码单元,所述中央编码单元660b具有与左侧编码单元660a和右侧编码单元660c的尺寸不同的尺寸。但是,所述图像解码装置100确定具有与其他编码单元的尺寸不同的尺寸的编码单元的过程仅为使用基于样点坐标确定的编码单元的尺寸来确定预定位置的编码单元的一个实施例,因此可以使用将根据预定的样点坐标确定的编码单元的尺寸进行比较来确定预定位置的编码单元的各种过程。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the width of the left coding unit 660a as xe-xd. The image decoding device 100 may determine the height of the left coding unit 660 a as the height of the current coding unit 650 . According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the width of the central coding unit 660b as xf-xe. The image decoding device 100 may determine the height of the central coding unit 660 b as the height of the current coding unit 600 . According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the width or height of the right coding unit 660c using the width or height of the current coding unit 650 and the width and height of the left coding unit 660a and the central coding unit 660b. The image decoding device 100 may determine a coding unit having a size different from that of other coding units based on the determined width and height of the coding units 660a, 660b, and 660c. Referring to FIG. 6 , the image decoding device 100 may determine a central coding unit 660b having a size different from those of the left coding unit 660a and the right coding unit 660c as a predetermined location coding unit. However, the process of the image decoding device 100 determining a coding unit having a size different from that of other coding units is only one embodiment of using the size of the coding unit determined based on the sample coordinates to determine the coding unit at the predetermined position, so Various processes of comparing sizes of coding units determined according to predetermined sample point coordinates to determine a coding unit at a predetermined location may be used.

然而,为了确定编码单元的位置而考虑的样点的位置不应被解释为局限于所述左侧上端,而可以被解释为可以使用关于包括在编码单元中的任何样点的位置的信息。However, the position of the samples considered for determining the position of the coding unit should not be construed as being limited to the left upper end but may be interpreted as information on the position of any sample included in the coding unit can be used.

根据一实施例,图像编码装置100可以考虑当前编码单元的形式来从通过划分当前编码单元而确定的奇数个编码单元中选择预定位置的编码单元。例如,若当前编码单元具有其宽度比高度大的非正方形形状,图像解码装置100可以根据水平方向确定处于预定位置的编码单元。换言之,图像解码装置100可以从在水平方向上位于不同位置的编码单元中确定一个并对该编码单元实施限制。若当前编码单元具有其高度比宽度大的非正方形形状,图像解码装置100可以根据垂直方向确定处于预定位置的编码单元。换言之,图像解码装置100可以从在垂直方向位于不同位置的编码单元中确定一个并对该编码单元实施限制。According to an embodiment, the image encoding device 100 may select a coding unit at a predetermined position from odd coding units determined by dividing the current coding unit in consideration of a form of the current coding unit. For example, if the current coding unit has a non-square shape whose width is greater than its height, the image decoding device 100 may determine the coding unit at a predetermined position according to the horizontal direction. In other words, the image decoding device 100 may determine one from coding units located at different positions in the horizontal direction and impose restrictions on the coding unit. If the current coding unit has a non-square shape whose height is greater than its width, the image decoding device 100 may determine a coding unit at a predetermined position according to a vertical direction. In other words, the image decoding device 100 may determine one from coding units located at different positions in the vertical direction and impose restrictions on the coding unit.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用指示偶数个编码单元的各个位置的信息来确定在偶数个编码单元中处于预定位置的编码单元。图像解码装置100可以通过划分(二划分;binary-split)当前编码单元来确定偶数个的编码单元,且可以使用关于偶数个的编码单元的位置的信息来确定处于预定位置的编码单元。对此的具体过程可对应于参照图6详细描述的从奇数个的编码单元中确定处于预定位置(例如,中央位置)的编码单元的过程,故不再赘述。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine a coding unit at a predetermined position among the even coding units using information indicating respective positions of the even coding units. The image decoding device 100 may determine an even number of coding units by splitting (binary-split) a current coding unit, and may determine a coding unit at a predetermined position using information on positions of the even number of coding units. The specific process for this may correspond to the process of determining a coding unit at a predetermined position (eg, a central position) from an odd number of coding units described in detail with reference to FIG. 6 , so details are not repeated here.

根据一实施例,当将具有非正方形形状的当前编码单元划分为多个编码单元时,在划分过程中可以使用关于处于预定位置的编码单元的预定信息来从多个编码单元中确定处于预定位置的编码单元。例如,图像解码装置100在划分过程中可以使用存储在包括在中央编码单元中的样点的块形状信息和划分形式模式信息中的至少一个,来从划分当前编码单元的多个的编码单元中确定处于中央的编码单元。According to an embodiment, when a current coding unit having a non-square shape is divided into a plurality of coding units, predetermined information about a coding unit at a predetermined position may be used in the division process to determine the coding unit at a predetermined position from among the plurality of coding units. coding unit. For example, the image decoding device 100 may use at least one of block shape information and split form mode information of samples stored in the central coding unit during the splitting process to select the current coding unit from a plurality of coding units that split the current coding unit. Determine the central coding unit.

参照图6,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息将当前编码单元600划分为多个编码单元620a、620b及620c,且可以从多个编码单元620a、620b及620c中确定处于中央的编码单元620b。进而,图像解码装置100可以考虑获得划分形式模式信息的位置来确定处于中央的编码单元620b。就是说,可以从处于当前编码单元600的中央的样点640获得划分形式模式信息,且可以基于所述划分形式模式信息来将在当前编码单元600划分为多个编码单元620a、620b及620c时包括所述样点640的编码单元620b确定为处于中央的编码单元。然而,用于确定位于中央的编码单元的信息不应被解释为局限于划分形式模式信息,而是各种信息可以被使用在确定位于中央的编码单元的过程中。Referring to FIG. 6 , the image decoding device 100 may divide the current coding unit 600 into a plurality of coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c based on the division form mode information, and may determine a central coding unit from among the plurality of coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c. 620b. Furthermore, the image decoding device 100 may determine the central coding unit 620b in consideration of the position where the division form mode information is obtained. That is, the division form mode information may be obtained from the sample point 640 at the center of the current coding unit 600, and the division form mode information when the current coding unit 600 is divided into a plurality of coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c may be obtained based on the division form mode information. The coding unit 620b including the sample point 640 is determined as the central coding unit. However, information for determining a centrally located coding unit should not be construed as being limited to split form pattern information, but various information may be used in determining a centrally located coding unit.

根据一实施例,用于识别处于预定位置的编码单元的预定的信息是可以从包括在在所要确定的编码单元中的预定的样点获得的。参照图6,图像解码装置100可以使用从当前编码单元600内的预定位置的样点(例如,位于当前编码单元600的中央的样点)获得的划分形式模式信息,来确定从通过划分当前编码单元600而确定的多个编码单元620a、620b及620c中的预定位置的编码单元(例如,在被划分为多个的编码单元中的位于中央的编码单元)。也就是说,图像解码装置100可以考虑当前编码单元600的块形状来确定所述位于预定位置的样点,且可以在通过划分当前编码单元600来确定的多个的编码单元620a、620b及620c中确定包括可以获得预定信息(例如,划分形式模式信息)的样点的编码单元620b并对该编码单元620b实施预定的限制。参照图6,根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将位于当前编码单元600的中央的样点640确定为可以用于获得预定的信息的样点,且可以在解码过程中对包括该样点640的编码单元620b实施预定的限制。然而,可以获得预定信息的样点的位置不应被解释为局限于上述的位置,而可以被解释为在为了设置限制而确定的编码单元620b中包括的任何位置的样点。According to an embodiment, predetermined information for identifying a coding unit at a predetermined position is obtainable from predetermined samples included in the coding unit to be determined. Referring to FIG. 6 , the image decoding device 100 may use division form mode information obtained from samples at predetermined positions within the current coding unit 600 (for example, samples located at the center of the current coding unit 600) to determine the number of points from which the current coding unit is divided. A coding unit at a predetermined position among the plurality of coding units 620 a , 620 b , and 620 c determined by the unit 600 (for example, a centrally located coding unit among the coding units divided into a plurality of coding units). That is to say, the image decoding device 100 may determine the sample point located at a predetermined position in consideration of the block shape of the current coding unit 600, and may determine the plurality of coding units 620a, 620b, and 620c by dividing the current coding unit 600. A coding unit 620b including a sample from which predetermined information (for example, division form mode information) can be obtained is determined and a predetermined restriction is imposed on the coding unit 620b. Referring to FIG. 6 , according to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the sample point 640 located in the center of the current coding unit 600 as a sample point that can be used to obtain predetermined information, and may include the sample point in the decoding process Encoding unit 620b of 640 enforces predetermined constraints. However, the position of a sample point where predetermined information can be obtained should not be construed as being limited to the above-mentioned position, but may be construed as a sample point of any position included in the encoding unit 620b determined for setting restrictions.

根据一实施例,可以获得预定信息的样点的位置是可以根据当前编码单元600的形状确定的。根据一实施例,块形状信息可以确定当前编码单元的形状是正方形还是非正方形,并且,可以根据该形状确定可以获得预定信息的样点的位置。例如,图像解码装置100可以使用当前编码单元的关于宽度的信息和关于高度的信息中的至少一个可以将位于将当前编码单元的宽度和高度中的至少一个对半划分的边界上的样点确定为可以从该样点获得预定信息的样点。根据另一个例子,当关于当前编码单元的块形状信息指示非正方形形状时,图像解码装置100可以将与将当前编码单元的长边对半划分的边界相邻的样点中的一个确定为可以获得预定信息的样点。According to an embodiment, the position of the sample point from which predetermined information can be obtained can be determined according to the shape of the current coding unit 600 . According to an embodiment, the block shape information may determine whether the shape of the current coding unit is square or non-square, and the position of a sample point from which predetermined information may be obtained may be determined according to the shape. For example, the image decoding device 100 may use at least one of the information about the width and the information about the height of the current coding unit to determine a sample point located on a boundary that divides at least one of the width and the height of the current coding unit in half. It is a sampling point from which predetermined information can be obtained from this sampling point. According to another example, when the block shape information on the current coding unit indicates a non-square shape, the image decoding device 100 may determine one of the samples adjacent to the boundary dividing the long side of the current coding unit in half as possible. Obtain samples of predetermined information.

根据一实施例,当将当前编码单元划分为多个编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以使用划分形式模式信息来确定在多个编码单元中位于预定位置的编码单元。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以从包括在编码单元中的预定位置的样点中获得划分形式模式信息,且可以通过使用从在多个编码单元中分别包括的预定位置的样点中获得的关于划分形式模式信息来将通过划分当前编码单元来生成的多个编码单元进行划分。换言之,可以使用从包括在各编码单元的预定位置的样点中获得的划分形式模式信息递归地划分编码单元。已参照图5详细描述了编码单元的递归划分过程,故不再赘述。According to an embodiment, when a current coding unit is divided into a plurality of coding units, the image decoding device 100 may determine a coding unit located at a predetermined position among the plurality of coding units using split form mode information. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may obtain division form mode information from samples at predetermined positions included in a coding unit, and may obtain division form mode information from samples at predetermined positions respectively included in a plurality of coding units by using A plurality of coding units generated by splitting the current coding unit are split using the information about the split form mode. In other words, the coding units may be recursively split using split form pattern information obtained from samples included in predetermined positions of each coding unit. The recursive division process of the coding unit has been described in detail with reference to FIG. 5 , so details are not repeated here.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过划分当前编码单元来确定至少一个编码单元,且可以根据预定的块(例如,当前编码单元)来确定对至少一个编码单元进行解码的顺序。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine at least one coding unit by dividing the current coding unit, and may determine an order of decoding the at least one coding unit according to a predetermined block (eg, the current coding unit).

图7图示根据一实施例的当图像解码装置100划分当前编码单元来确定多个编码单元时多个编码单元被处理的顺序。FIG. 7 illustrates an order in which a plurality of coding units are processed when the image decoding device 100 divides a current coding unit to determine a plurality of coding units, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以根据划分形式模式信息以垂直方向划分第一编码单元700来确定第二编码单元710a和710b,以水平方向划分第一编码单元来确定第二编码单元730a和730b,或者以垂直方向和水平方向划分第一编码单元700来确定第二编码单元750a、750b、750c,及750d。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 700 in the vertical direction to determine the second coding units 710a and 710b according to the division mode information, and divide the first coding unit in the horizontal direction to determine the second coding units 730a and 730a. 730b, or divide the first coding unit 700 vertically and horizontally to determine the second coding units 750a, 750b, 750c, and 750d.

参照图7,图像解码装置100可以确定顺序以使通过以垂直方向划分第一编码单元700来确定的第二编码单元710a和710b被以水平方向710c处理。图像解码装置100可以将通过以水平方向划分第一编码单元700来确定的第二编码单元730a和730b的处理顺序为垂直方向730c。图像解码装置100可以根据位于一个行的编码单元被处理后位于下一个行的编码单元被处理的预定顺序(例如,光栅扫描顺序(raster scan order)或z扫描顺序(z scanorder)750e等)来确定通过以垂直方向和水平方向划分第一编码单元700来确定的第二编码单元750a、750b、750c,750d。Referring to FIG. 7 , the image decoding device 100 may determine an order such that second coding units 710 a and 710 b determined by dividing the first coding unit 700 in a vertical direction are processed in a horizontal direction 710 c. The image decoding device 100 may place the processing order of the second coding units 730 a and 730 b determined by dividing the first coding unit 700 in a horizontal direction into a vertical direction 730 c. The image decoding device 100 may perform the processing according to a predetermined order (for example, raster scan order (raster scan order) or z scan order (z scan order) 750e, etc.) The second coding units 750a, 750b, 750c, 750d determined by dividing the first coding unit 700 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are determined.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以递归地划分编码单元。参照图7,图像解码装置100可以通过划分第一编码单元700来确定多个编码单元710a、710b、730a、730b、750a、750b、750c、750d,且可以递归地划分所确定的多个编码单元710a、710b、730a、730b、750a、750b、750c、750d。划分多个编码单元710a、710b、730a、730b、750a、750b、750c、750d的方法可以是与划分第一编码单元700的方法对应的方法。因此,多个编码单元710a、710b、730a、730b、750a、750b、750c、750d可以各自独立地被划分为多个编码单元。参照图7,图像解码装置100可以以垂直方向划分第一编码单元700来确定第二编码单元710a和710b,进而,也可以确定将第二编码单元710a和710b进行划分或不进行划分。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may recursively divide coding units. Referring to FIG. 7 , the image decoding device 100 may determine a plurality of coding units 710a, 710b, 730a, 730b, 750a, 750b, 750c, and 750d by dividing the first coding unit 700, and may recursively divide the determined plurality of coding units. 710a, 710b, 730a, 730b, 750a, 750b, 750c, 75Od. A method of dividing a plurality of coding units 710 a , 710 b , 730 a , 730 b , 750 a , 750 b , 750 c , 750 d may be a method corresponding to a method of dividing the first coding unit 700 . Accordingly, the plurality of coding units 710a, 710b, 730a, 730b, 750a, 750b, 750c, 750d may each be independently divided into a plurality of coding units. Referring to FIG. 7 , the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 700 in a vertical direction to determine the second coding units 710a and 710b, and further, may determine whether to divide the second coding units 710a and 710b or not.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将左侧的第二编码单元710a以水平方向划分为第三编码单元720a和720b,而可以不划分右侧的第二编码单元710b。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the second coding unit 710a on the left side into third coding units 720a and 720b in the horizontal direction, but may not divide the second coding unit 710b on the right side.

根据一实施例,编码单元的处理顺序是可以根据编码单元的划分过程确定的。换言之,划分的编码单元的处理顺序是可以基于划分之前的编码单元的处理顺序来确定的。图像解码装置100可以与右侧的第二编码单元710b分开地确定对通过划分左侧的第二编码单元710a来确定的第三编码单元720a和720b的处理顺序。由于通过以水平方向划分左侧的第二编码单元710a来确定第三编码单元720a和720b,可以以垂直方向720c处理第三编码单元720a和720b。并且,左侧的第二编码单元710a和右侧的第二编码单元710b被处理的顺序相当于水平方向710c,因此,在在左侧的第二编码单元710a中包括的第三编码单元720a和720b被以垂直方向720c处理后,右侧编码单元710b可以被处理。上述的内容仅用于说明根据划分前的编码单元确定各编码单元的处理顺序的过程,不应将其解释为限于上述实施例,应解释为上述内容适用于以各种形式划分来确定的编码单元可以按照预定顺序独立地处理的各种方法。According to an embodiment, the processing order of the coding units may be determined according to the division process of the coding units. In other words, the processing order of the split coding units may be determined based on the processing order of the coding units before splitting. The image decoding device 100 may determine a processing order of the third coding units 720 a and 720 b determined by splitting the second coding unit 710 a on the left separately from the second coding unit 710 b on the right. Since the third coding units 720a and 720b are determined by dividing the second coding unit 710a on the left in a horizontal direction, the third coding units 720a and 720b may be processed in a vertical direction 720c. Also, the order in which the second coding unit 710a on the left and the second coding unit 710b on the right are processed corresponds to the horizontal direction 710c, and therefore, the third coding unit 720a included in the second coding unit 710a on the left and After 720b is processed in the vertical direction 720c, the right coding unit 710b may be processed. The above content is only used to illustrate the process of determining the processing order of each coding unit according to the coding unit before division, and it should not be interpreted as being limited to the above embodiment, but should be interpreted as the above content is applicable to coding determined by division in various forms Various methods in which units can be independently processed in a predetermined order.

图8图示根据一实施例的当图像解码装置100不能按照预定的顺序处理编码单元时确定当前编码单元将被划分为奇数个的编码单元的过程。FIG. 8 illustrates a process of determining that a current coding unit will be divided into an odd number of coding units when the image decoding device 100 cannot process coding units in a predetermined order, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100基于关于所获得的块形状信息和划分形式模式信息来确定当前编码单元被划分为奇数个编码单元。参照图8,具有正方形形状的第一编码单元800可以被划分为非正方形的第二编码单元810a和810b,第二编码单元810a和810b可以各自独立地被划分为第三编码单元820a、820b、820c、820d和820e。根据一实施例,在第二编码单元中,图像解码装置100可以将左侧编码单元810a以水平方向划分来确定多个第三编码单元820a和820b,且可以将右侧编码单元810b划分为奇数个的第三编码单元820c、820d和820e。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 determines that the current coding unit is divided into an odd number of coding units based on information about the obtained block shape and split form mode. Referring to FIG. 8, a first coding unit 800 having a square shape may be divided into non-square second coding units 810a and 810b, and the second coding units 810a and 810b may be each independently divided into third coding units 820a, 820b, 820c, 820d and 820e. According to an embodiment, in the second coding unit, the image decoding device 100 may divide the left coding unit 810a in the horizontal direction to determine a plurality of third coding units 820a and 820b, and may divide the right coding unit 810b into an odd number The third encoding units 820c, 820d and 820e.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以判断第三编码单元820a、820b、820c、820d和820e是否可以按照预定的顺序被处理来确定是否存在划分为奇数个的编码单元。参照图8,图像解码装置100可以递归地划分第一编码单元800来确定第三编码单元820a、820b、820c、820d和820e。图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息来确定第一编码单元800、第二编码单元810a和810b或第三编码单元820a、820b、820c、820d和820e在划分形式中是否被划分为奇数个编码单元。例如,在第二编码单元810a和810b中位于右侧的编码单元可以被划分为奇数个的第三编码单元820c、820d和820e。在第一编码单元800中包括的多个编码单元的处理顺序可以为预定顺序(例如,z-扫描顺序(z-scan order)830,图像解码装置100可以判断通过将右侧的第二编码单元810b划分为奇数个来确定的第三编码单元820c、820d和820e是否满足可以按照所述预定顺序被处理的条件。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether the third coding units 820a, 820b, 820c, 820d, and 820e can be processed in a predetermined order to determine whether there are coding units divided into an odd number. Referring to FIG. 8 , the image decoding device 100 may recursively divide the first coding unit 800 to determine third coding units 820a, 820b, 820c, 820d, and 820e. The image decoding device 100 may determine whether the first encoding unit 800, the second encoding units 810a and 810b, or the third encoding units 820a, 820b, 820c, 820d, and 820e are divided into an odd number of encodings in the dividing form based on the division form mode information. unit. For example, coding units located on the right side in the second coding units 810a and 810b may be divided into an odd number of third coding units 820c, 820d, and 820e. The processing order of the plurality of coding units included in the first coding unit 800 may be a predetermined order (for example, a z-scan order (z-scan order) 830, and the image decoding device 100 may determine that by placing the second coding unit on the right 810b is divided into an odd number to determine whether the third encoding units 820c, 820d, and 820e satisfy a condition that they can be processed in the predetermined order.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以确定在第一编码单元800中包括的第三编码单元820a、820b、820c、820d和820e是否满足可以按照预定顺序被处理的条件,所述条件与是否可以按照第三编码单元820a、820b、820c、820d和820e的边界将第二编码单元810a和810b的宽度和高度中的至少一个对半划分有关。例如,通过将非正方形形状的左侧第二编码单元810a的高度对半划分来确定的第三编码单元820a和820b可以满足条件。通过将右侧第二编码单元810b划分为三个编码单元而确定的第三编码单元820c、820d、820e的边界不能将右侧第二编码单元810b的宽度或高度对半划分,因此可以确定第三编码单元820c、820d和820e不满足条件。图像解码装置100可以将这种条件不满足的情况判断为扫描顺序的不连续(disconnection),且可以基于判断结果确定右侧第二编码单元810b被划分为奇数个的编码单元。根据一实施例,当编码单元被划分为奇数个的编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以对划分出的编码单元中的在预定位置的编码单元实施预定的限制,由于参照各种实施例详细描述了关于这些限制内容或预定位置,故不再赘述。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether the third encoding units 820a, 820b, 820c, 820d, and 820e included in the first encoding unit 800 satisfy a condition that they can be processed in a predetermined order, the conditions are the same as whether they can At least one of the width and height of the second coding units 810a and 810b is divided in half according to the boundaries of the third coding units 820a, 820b, 820c, 820d, and 820e. For example, the third coding units 820a and 820b determined by dividing the height of the non-square-shaped left second coding unit 810a in half may satisfy the condition. The boundaries of the third coding units 820c, 820d, and 820e determined by dividing the second coding unit 810b on the right side into three coding units cannot divide the width or height of the second coding unit 810b on the right side in half, so it can be determined that Three encoding units 820c, 820d and 820e do not satisfy the condition. The image decoding device 100 may determine that the condition is not satisfied as a discontinuity of the scanning order (disconnection), and may determine that the second coding unit 810b on the right is divided into an odd number of coding units based on the determination result. According to an embodiment, when the coding unit is divided into an odd number of coding units, the image decoding device 100 may impose a predetermined restriction on the coding unit at a predetermined position among the divided coding units, since the detailed description with reference to various embodiments About these restricted content or predetermined location, so no more details.

图9图示根据一实施例的图像解码装置100划分第一编码单元900来确定至少一个编码单元的过程。FIG. 9 illustrates a process in which the image decoding device 100 divides the first coding unit 900 to determine at least one coding unit, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于从接收器(未示出)获得的划分形式模式信息来划分第一编码单元900。正方形的第一编码单元900可以被划分为具有正方形形状的四个编码单元或被划分为多个的非正方形形状的编码单元。例如,参照图9,当第一编码单元900为正方形且划分形式模式信息指示以非正方形的编码单元划分时,图像解码装置100可以将第一编码单元900划分为多个非正方形的编码单元。具体地,当划分形式模式信息指示通过以水平方向或垂直方向划分第一编码单元900来确定奇数个编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以将正方形形状的第一编码单元900划分为奇数个的编码单元,即,以垂直方向划分来确定的第二编码单元910a、910b和910c或通过以水平方向划分来确定的第二编码单元920a、920b和920c。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may split the first coding unit 900 based on split form mode information obtained from a receiver (not shown). The square first coding unit 900 may be divided into four coding units having a square shape or divided into a plurality of non-square shaped coding units. For example, referring to FIG. 9 , when the first coding unit 900 is square and the division form mode information indicates division in non-square coding units, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 900 into a plurality of non-square coding units. Specifically, when the division form mode information indicates that an odd number of coding units is determined by dividing the first coding unit 900 in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction, the image decoding device 100 may divide the square-shaped first coding unit 900 into an odd number of coding units. units, that is, the second coding units 910a, 910b, and 910c determined by dividing in the vertical direction or the second coding units 920a, 920b, and 920c determined by dividing in the horizontal direction.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以确定在第一编码单元900中包括的第二编码单元910a、910b、910c、920a、920b和920c是否满足可以按照预定顺序处理的条件,所述条件与是否可以按照第二编码单元910a、910b、910c、920a、920b和920c的边界将第一编码单元900的宽度和高度中至少一个对半划分有关。参照图9,通过以垂直方向划分正方形形状的第一编码单元900来确定的第二编码单元910a、910b和910c的边界不能将第一编码单元900的宽度对半划分,因此可以确定第一编码单元900不满足可以按照预定顺序处理的条件。并且,通过以水平方向划分正方形形状的第一编码单元900来确定的第二编码单元920a、920b和920c的边界不能将第一编码单元900的高度对半划分,因此可以确定第一编码单元900不满足可以按照预定顺序处理的条件。图像解码装置可以将这种条件不满足的情况判断为扫描顺序的不连续(disconnection),基于判断结果,可以确定第一编码单元900划分为奇数个的编码单元。根据一实施例,当编码单元被划分为奇数个的编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以对划分出的编码单元中的在预定位置的编码单元实施预定的限制,由于参照各种实施例详细描述了关于这些限制内容或预定位置,故不再赘述。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether the second encoding units 910a, 910b, 910c, 920a, 920b, and 920c included in the first encoding unit 900 satisfy a condition that can be processed in a predetermined order, the condition being the same as whether At least one of the width and the height of the first coding unit 900 may be divided in half according to boundaries of the second coding units 910a, 910b, 910c, 920a, 920b, and 920c. Referring to FIG. 9 , the boundaries of the second coding units 910a, 910b, and 910c determined by dividing the square-shaped first coding unit 900 in the vertical direction cannot divide the width of the first coding unit 900 in half, and thus the first coding unit 900 can be determined. Unit 900 does not meet the conditions that can be processed in a predetermined order. Also, the boundaries of the second coding units 920a, 920b, and 920c determined by dividing the square-shaped first coding unit 900 in the horizontal direction cannot divide the height of the first coding unit 900 in half, and thus it is possible to determine that the first coding unit 900 The conditions that can be processed in the predetermined order are not met. The image decoding device may determine that the condition is not satisfied as a discontinuity of the scanning sequence (disconnection), and based on the determination result, may determine that the first coding unit 900 is divided into an odd number of coding units. According to an embodiment, when the coding unit is divided into an odd number of coding units, the image decoding device 100 may impose a predetermined restriction on the coding unit at a predetermined position among the divided coding units, as described in detail with reference to various embodiments About these restricted content or predetermined location, so no more details.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以划分第一编码单元来确定各种形式的编码单元。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit to determine various forms of coding units.

参照图9,图像解码装置100可以将正方形形状的第一编码单元900、非正方形形状的第一编码单元930或950划分为各种形式的编码单元。Referring to FIG. 9 , the image decoding device 100 may divide a square-shaped first coding unit 900 and a non-square-shaped first coding unit 930 or 950 into various forms of coding units.

图10图示根据一实施例的当图像解码装置100划分第一编码单元1000来确定的非正方形形状的第二编码单元满足预定条件时,可划分第二编码单元的形式受到限制。10 illustrates that when the image decoding device 100 divides the first coding unit 1000 to determine that the non-square-shaped second coding unit satisfies a predetermined condition, a form in which the second coding unit can be divided is limited, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于从接收器(未示出)获得的划分形式模式信息来确定将正方形形状的第一编码单元1000划分为非正方形形状的第二编码单元1010a、1010b、1020a、及1020b)。第二编码单元1010a、1010b、1020a和1020b可以被独立地划分。由此,图像解码装置100可以基于各个第二编码单元1010a、1010b、1020a和1020b的划分形式模式信息确定将第二编码单元1010a、1010b、1020a和1020b分别划分为多个编码单元或确定不进行划分。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将通过以垂直方向划分第一编码单元1000确定的非正方形形状的左侧第二编码单元1010a以水平方向划分来确定第三编码单元1012a和1012b。只是,图像解码装置100可以以水平方向划分左侧的第二编码单元1010a后限制右侧的编码单元1010b不可以被以与左侧第二编码划分1010a的划分方向相同的水平方向划分。当通过以相同的方向划分右侧的第二编码单元1010b来确定第三编码单元1014a和1014b时,可以以水平方向各自独立地划分左侧的第二编码单元1010a和右侧的第二编码单元1010b来确定第三编码单元1012a、1012b、1014a和1014b。然而,这是与图像解码装置100基于划分形式模式信息将第一编码单元1000划分为四个正方形形状的第二编码单元1030a、1030b、1030c和1030d相同的结果,这在图像解码的角度来看可能是低效率的。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine to divide the square-shaped first coding unit 1000 into non-square-shaped second coding units 1010a, 1010b, based on division form mode information obtained from a receiver (not shown). 1020a, and 1020b). The second coding units 1010a, 1010b, 1020a, and 1020b may be independently divided. Thus, the image decoding device 100 may determine to divide the second coding units 1010a, 1010b, 1020a, and 1020b into multiple coding units or determine not to divide the second coding units 1010a, 1010b, 1020a, and 1020b based on the division form mode information of the respective second coding units 1010a, 1010b, 1020a, and 1020b. divided. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the third coding units 1012 a and 1012 b by dividing the non-square-shaped left second coding unit 1010 a determined by dividing the first coding unit 1000 in the vertical direction in the horizontal direction. However, the image decoding device 100 may divide the left second coding unit 1010a in the horizontal direction and restrict the right coding unit 1010b from being divided in the same horizontal direction as that of the left second coding unit 1010a. When the third coding units 1014a and 1014b are determined by dividing the second coding unit 1010b on the right side in the same direction, the second coding unit 1010a on the left side and the second coding unit on the right side may each be independently divided in the horizontal direction. 1010b to determine the third coding unit 1012a, 1012b, 1014a and 1014b. However, this is the same result as the image decoding device 100 divides the first coding unit 1000 into four square-shaped second coding units 1030a, 1030b, 1030c, and 1030d based on the division form mode information, which is viewed from the perspective of image decoding May be inefficient.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过将以水平方向划分第一编码单元1000来确定的非正方形形状的第二编码单元1020a或1020b以垂直方向划分来确定第三编码单元1022a、1022b、1024a和1024b。然而,当将第二编码单元中的一个(例如,上端第二编码单元1020a)以垂直方向划分时,根据上述的理由,图像解码装置100可以限制另一第二编码单元(例如下端编码单元1020b不能被以与划分上端第二编码单元1020a的方向相同的垂直方向划分。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the third coding unit 1022a, 1022b, 1024a by dividing the non-square-shaped second coding unit 1020a or 1020b determined by dividing the first coding unit 1000 in the horizontal direction in the vertical direction. and 1024b. However, when one of the second coding units (for example, the upper second coding unit 1020a) is divided in the vertical direction, the image decoding device 100 may restrict the other second coding unit (for example, the lower coding unit 1020b ) for the reason described above. It cannot be divided in the same vertical direction as the direction in which the upper second coding unit 1020a is divided.

图11图示根据一实施例的当划分形式模式信息不能指示划分为四个正方形形状的编码单元时图像解码装置100划分正方形形状的编码单元的过程。FIG. 11 illustrates a process in which the image decoding device 100 divides a square-shaped coding unit when the division form pattern information cannot indicate division into four square-shaped coding units, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息中划分第一编码单元1100来确定第二编码单元1110a、1110b、1120a和1120b等。划分形式模式信息可以包括关于可以划分编码单元的各种形式的信息,然而,在有些情况下,关于各种形式的包括不能包括用于将编码单元划分为正方形的四个编码单元的信息。根据该划分形式模式信息,图像解码装置100不能将正方形形状的第一编码单元1100划分为四个正方形形状的第二编码单元1130a、1130b、1130c和1130d。基于划分形式模式信息,图像解码装置100可以确定非正方形形状的第二编码单元1110a、1110b、1120a和1120b等。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding units 1110a, 1110b, 1120a, 1120b, etc. based on dividing the first coding unit 1100 in the division form mode information. The split form mode information may include information on various forms in which a coding unit may be divided, however, in some cases, information on various forms including four coding units for dividing a coding unit into a square may not be included. According to the split form mode information, the image decoding device 100 cannot split the square-shaped first coding unit 1100 into four square-shaped second coding units 1130a, 1130b, 1130c, and 1130d. Based on the split form mode information, the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding units 1110 a , 1110 b , 1120 a , and 1120 b of a non-square shape, and so on.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以各自独立地划分非正方形形状的第二编码单元1110a、1110b、1120a和1120b等。各个第二编码单元1110a、1110b、1120a和1120b通过递归的方法按照预定的顺序被划分,这可以是与基于划分形式模式信息划分第一编码单元1100的方法对应的划分方法。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may each independently divide the non-square-shaped second coding units 1110a, 1110b, 1120a, and 1120b, and the like. The respective second coding units 1110a, 1110b, 1120a, and 1120b are divided in a predetermined order by a recursive method, which may be a division method corresponding to a method of dividing the first coding unit 1100 based on division form mode information.

例如,图像解码装置100可以通过以水平方向划分左侧第二编码单元1110a来确定正方形形状的第三编码单元1112a和1112b,且可以通过以水平方向划分右侧第二编码单元1110b来确定正方形形状的第三编码单元1114a和1114b。进而,图像解码装置100可以通过将左侧第二编码单元1110a和右侧第二编码单元1110b均以水平方向划分来确定正方形形状的第三编码单元1116a、1116b、1116c和1116d。在这种情况下,可以以与第一编码单元1100被划分为四个正方形形状的第二编码单元1130a、1130b、1130c和1130d的形式相同的形式确定编码单元。For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine the square-shaped third coding units 1112a and 1112b by dividing the left second coding unit 1110a in the horizontal direction, and may determine the square shape by dividing the right second coding unit 1110b in the horizontal direction. The third encoding units 1114a and 1114b of . Further, the image decoding device 100 may determine square-shaped third coding units 1116 a , 1116 b , 1116 c , and 1116 d by dividing both the left second coding unit 1110 a and the right second coding unit 1110 b in a horizontal direction. In this case, the coding unit may be determined in the same form as that in which the first coding unit 1100 is divided into four square-shaped second coding units 1130a, 1130b, 1130c, and 1130d.

根据另一个例子,图像解码装置100可以通过以垂直方向划分上端第二编码单元1120a来确定正方形形状的第三编码单元1122a和1122b,且可以通过以垂直方向划分下端第二编码单元1120b来确定正方形形状的第三编码单元1124a和1124b。进而,图像解码装置100可以通过将上端第二编码单元1120a和下端第二编码单元1120b均以垂直方向划分来确定正方形形状的第三编码单元1126a、1126b、1126a和1126b。在这种情况下,可以与将第一编码单元1100划分为四个正方形形状的第二编码单元1130a、1130b、1130c和1130d类似的形状确定编码单元。According to another example, the image decoding device 100 may determine the square-shaped third coding units 1122a and 1122b by dividing the upper second coding unit 1120a in the vertical direction, and may determine the square shape by dividing the lower second coding unit 1120b in the vertical direction. The third encoding units 1124a and 1124b of shape. Furthermore, the image decoding device 100 may determine square-shaped third coding units 1126 a , 1126 b , 1126 a , and 1126 b by dividing both the upper second coding unit 1120 a and the lower second coding unit 1120 b in a vertical direction. In this case, the coding unit may be determined in a shape similar to the second coding units 1130 a , 1130 b , 1130 c , and 1130 d that divide the first coding unit 1100 into four square shapes.

图12图示根据一实施例的多个编码单元之间的处理顺序可以根据编码单元的划分过程而变更。FIG. 12 illustrates that a processing order among a plurality of coding units may be changed according to a division process of coding units according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息来划分第一编码单元1200。当块形状为正方形形状且划分形式模式信息指示第一编码单元1200被以水平方向和垂直方向中的至少一个方向划分时,图像解码装置100可以通过划分第一编码单元1200来确定第二编码单元(例如,1210a、1210b、1220a和1220b等)。参照图12,通过仅以水平方向或垂直方向划分第一编码单元1200来确定的非正方形形状的第二编码单元1210a、1210b、1220a和1220b可以基于关于各第二编码单元1210a、1210b、1220a和1220b的划分形式模式信息被独立地划分。例如,图像解码装置100可以将通过以垂直方向划分第一编码单元1200来生成的第二编码单元1210a和1210b分别以水平方向划分来确定第三编码单元1216a、1216b、1216c和1216d,且可以将通过以水平方向划分第一编码单元1200生成的第二编码单元1220a和1220b分别以水平方向划分来确定第三编码单元1226a、1226b、1226c和1226d。已结合图11详细地描述了第二编码单元1210a、1210b、1220a和1220b的划分过程,故不再赘述。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 1200 based on the division form mode information. When the block shape is a square shape and the division form mode information indicates that the first coding unit 1200 is divided in at least one of a horizontal direction and a vertical direction, the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding unit by dividing the first coding unit 1200 (eg, 1210a, 1210b, 1220a, and 1220b, etc.). Referring to FIG. 12 , non-square-shaped second coding units 1210a, 1210b, 1220a, and 1220b determined by dividing the first coding unit 1200 only in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction may be based on information about each of the second coding units 1210a, 1210b, 1220a, and The division form pattern information of 1220b is divided independently. For example, the image decoding device 100 may divide the second coding units 1210a and 1210b generated by dividing the first coding unit 1200 in the vertical direction into the horizontal direction to determine the third coding units 1216a, 1216b, 1216c, and 1216d, and may divide The third coding units 1226a, 1226b, 1226c, and 1226d are determined by dividing the second coding units 1220a and 1220b generated by the first coding unit 1200 in the horizontal direction, respectively. The division process of the second coding units 1210a, 1210b, 1220a, and 1220b has been described in detail in conjunction with FIG. 11 , so details are not repeated here.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以按照预定的顺序来处理编码单元。已经结合图7描述了关于按照预定顺序的编码单元的处理的特征,故不再赘述。参照图12,图像解码装置100可以划分正方形形状的第一编码单元1200来确定四个正方形形状的第三编码单元1216a、1216b、1216c、1216d、1226a、1226b、1226c和1226d。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以根据第一编码单元100被划分的形式确定第三编码单元1216a、1216b、1216c、1216d、1226a、1226b、1226c和1226d的处理顺序。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may process coding units in a predetermined order. Features related to the processing of coding units in a predetermined order have already been described in conjunction with FIG. 7 , so details are not repeated here. Referring to FIG. 12 , the image decoding device 100 may divide the square-shaped first coding unit 1200 to determine four square-shaped third coding units 1216a, 1216b, 1216c, 1216d, 1226a, 1226b, 1226c, and 1226d. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine a processing order of the third coding units 1216a, 1216b, 1216c, 1216d, 1226a, 1226b, 1226c, and 1226d according to the form in which the first coding unit 100 is divided.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过将以垂直方向划分而生成的第二编码单元1210a和1210b分别以水平方向划分来确定第三编码单元1216a、1216b、1216c和1216d,且可以按首先以垂直方向处理在左侧第二编码单元1210a中包括的第三编码单元1216a和1216c,然后以垂直方向处理在右侧第二编码单元1210b中包括的第三编码单元1216b和1216d的顺序1217来处理第三编码单元1216a、1216b、1216c和1216d。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the third coding units 1216a, 1216b, 1216c, and 1216d by dividing the second coding units 1210a and 1210b generated by dividing the vertical direction respectively in the horizontal direction, and may firstly use The third coding units 1216a and 1216c included in the second coding unit 1210a on the left are processed in the vertical direction, and then processed in the order 1217 of the third coding units 1216b and 1216d included in the second coding unit 1210b on the right in the vertical direction. The third encoding units 1216a, 1216b, 1216c and 1216d.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过将以水平方向划分而生成的第二编码单元1220a和1220b分别以垂直方向划分来确定第三编码单元1226a、1226b、1226c和1226d,且可以按首先以垂直方向处理在上端第二编码单元1220a中包括的第三编码单元1226a和1226b,然后以垂直方向处理在下端第二编码单元1220b中包括的第三编码单元1226c和1226d的顺序1227来处理第三编码单元1226a、1226b、1226c和1226d。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the third coding units 1226a, 1226b, 1226c, and 1226d by dividing the second coding units 1220a and 1220b generated by dividing them in the horizontal direction respectively in the vertical direction, and may first use The third encoding units 1226a and 1226b included in the upper second encoding unit 1220a are processed in the vertical direction, and then the third encoding units 1226c and 1226d included in the lower second encoding unit 1220b are processed in the order 1227 of the vertical direction. Coding units 1226a, 1226b, 1226c, and 1226d.

参照图12,通过将第二编码单元1210a、1210b、1220a和1220b各自划分可以确定正方形形状的第三编码单元1216a、1216b、1216c、1216d、1226a、1226b、1226c和1226d。以垂直方向划分而确定的第二编码单元1210a和1210b及以水平方向划分而确定的第二编码单元1220a和1220b是以彼此不同的形式划分的,然而,如果根据稍后被确定的第三编码单元,第一编码单元1200可以被划分为相同形状的编码单元。基于此,通过基于划分形式模式信息来将编码单元以不同的过程进行递归划分,即使确定了结果上相同形状的多个编码单元,但是图像解码装置100可以按彼此不同的顺序来处理这种确定的相同形状的多个编码单元。12, square-shaped third coding units 1216a, 1216b, 1216c, 1216d, 1226a, 1226b, 1226c, and 1226d may be determined by dividing the second coding units 1210a, 1210b, 1220a, and 1220b, respectively. The second coding units 1210a and 1210b determined by dividing in the vertical direction and the second coding units 1220a and 1220b determined by dividing in the horizontal direction are divided in different forms from each other, however, if according to the third coding unit determined later Units, the first coding unit 1200 may be divided into coding units of the same shape. Based on this, by recursively dividing the coding unit in different processes based on the division form mode information, even if a plurality of coding units having the same shape as a result is determined, the image decoding device 100 can process such determination in a different order from each other. Multiple coding units of the same shape.

图13图示根据一实施例的当递归地划分编码单元来确定多个编码单元时随着编码单元的形状和尺寸的变化而确定编码单元的深度的过程。FIG. 13 illustrates a process of determining a depth of a coding unit as a shape and a size of the coding unit vary when the coding unit is recursively divided to determine a plurality of coding units, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以根据预定的基准确定编码单元的深度。例如,预定的基准可以是编码单元的长边的长度。当以划分前的编码单元的长边的长度的2n(n>0)倍来将当前编码单元的长边的长度划分时,图像解码装置100可以确定当前编码单元的深度比划分前的编码单元的深度增加了n。以下,将其深度增加的编码单元表现为具有下位深度的编码单元。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine a depth of a coding unit according to a predetermined reference. For example, the predetermined reference may be the length of the long side of the coding unit. When the length of the long side of the current coding unit is divided by 2n (n>0) times the length of the long side of the coding unit before splitting, the image decoding device 100 may determine that the depth of the current coding unit is deeper than that of the coding unit before splitting. The depth increases by n. Hereinafter, a coding unit whose depth is increased is represented as a coding unit having a lower bit depth.

参照图13,基于根据一实施例指示正方形形状的块形状信息(例如,块形状信息可以指示‘0:SQUARE’),图像解码装置100可以通过划分正方形形状的第一编码单元1300来确定下位深度的第二编码单元1302、第三编码单元1304等。若假定正方形形状的第一编码单元1300的尺寸为2N×2N,通过以1/2倍划分第一编码单元1300的宽度和高度而确定的第二编码单元1302可以具有N×N的尺寸。进而,通过将第二编码单元1302的宽度和高度分别划分为1/2尺寸而确定的第三编码单元1304可以具有N/2×N/2的尺寸。此时,第三编码单元1304的宽度和高度分别相当于第一编码单元1300的宽度和高度的1/4倍。当第一编码单元1300的深度为D时,第一编码单元1300的宽度和高度的1/2倍的第二编码单元1302的深度可以为D+1,第一编码单元1300的宽度和高度的1/4倍的第三编码单元1304的深度可以为D+2。Referring to FIG. 13 , based on block shape information indicating a square shape according to an embodiment (for example, the block shape information may indicate '0:SQUARE'), the image decoding device 100 may determine a lower bit depth by dividing the first coding unit 1300 having a square shape. The second encoding unit 1302, the third encoding unit 1304, and so on. If it is assumed that the square-shaped first coding unit 1300 has a size of 2N×2N, the second coding unit 1302 determined by dividing the width and height of the first coding unit 1300 by 1/2 times may have a size of N×N. Further, the third coding unit 1304 determined by dividing the width and height of the second coding unit 1302 into 1/2 size, respectively, may have a size of N/2×N/2. At this time, the width and height of the third coding unit 1304 are respectively equivalent to 1/4 times the width and height of the first coding unit 1300 . When the depth of the first coding unit 1300 is D, the depth of the second coding unit 1302 that is 1/2 times the width and height of the first coding unit 1300 may be D+1, and the width and height of the first coding unit 1300 The depth of the 1/4 times third coding unit 1304 may be D+2.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于指示非正方形形状的块形状信息(例如,块形状信息可以指示'1:NS_VER',其指示高度长于宽度的非正方形,或者'2:NS_HOR',其指示宽度长于高度的非正方形)来划分非正方形形状的第一编码单元1310或1320而确定下位深度的第二编码单元1312或1322、第三编码单元1314或1324等。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may be based on block shape information indicating a non-square shape (for example, the block shape information may indicate '1: NS_VER', which indicates a non-square shape whose height is longer than width, or '2: NS_HOR', which Indicates that the width is longer than the height of the non-square) to divide the non-square shape of the first coding unit 1310 or 1320 to determine the second coding unit 1312 or 1322 of the lower bit depth, the third coding unit 1314 or 1324, and so on.

图像解码装置100可以通过划分具有N×2N尺寸的第一编码单元1310的宽度和高度中的至少一个来确定第二编码单元(例如,第二编码单元1302、1312和1322等)。换言之,图像解码装置100可以以水平方向划分第一编码单元1310来确定具有N×N尺寸的第二编码单元1302或具有N×N/2尺寸的第二编码单元1322,也可以以水平方向和垂直方向划分来确定具有N/2×N尺寸的第二编码单元1312。The image decoding device 100 may determine a second coding unit (eg, second coding units 1302 , 1312 , and 1322 , etc.) by dividing at least one of a width and a height of the first coding unit 1310 having an N×2N size. In other words, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 1310 in the horizontal direction to determine the second coding unit 1302 having the size of N×N or the second coding unit 1322 having the size of N×N/2, or may divide the first coding unit 1310 in the horizontal direction and The second coding unit 1312 having a size of N/2×N is determined by dividing in the vertical direction.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过划分具有2N×N尺寸的第一编码单元1320的宽度和高度中的至少一个来确定第二编码单元(例如,1302、1312和1322等)。也就是说,图像解码装置100可以通过以垂直方向划分第一编码单元1320来确定具有N×N尺寸的第二编码单元1302或具有N/2×N尺寸的第二编码单元1312,也可以以水平方向和垂直方向来确定N×N/2尺寸的第二编码单元1322。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding unit (eg, 1302 , 1312 , and 1322 , etc.) by dividing at least one of a width and a height of the first coding unit 1320 having a size of 2N×N. That is to say, the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding unit 1302 having an N×N size or the second coding unit 1312 having an N/2×N size by dividing the first coding unit 1320 in a vertical direction, or in The second coding unit 1322 of size N×N/2 is determined according to the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过划分具有N×N尺寸的第二编码单元1302的宽度和高度中的至少一个来确定第三编码单元(例如,1304、1314和1324等)。换言之,图像解码装置100可以通过以垂直方向和水平方向划分第二编码单元1302来确定具有N/2×N/2尺寸的第三编码单元1302,确定具有N/4×N/2尺寸的第三编码单元1314,或确定具有N/2×N/4尺寸的第三编码单元1324。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine a third coding unit (eg, 1304 , 1314 , and 1324 , etc.) by dividing at least one of a width and a height of the second coding unit 1302 having an N×N size. In other words, the image decoding device 100 may determine the third coding unit 1302 having a size of N/2×N/2 and the third coding unit 1302 having a size of N/4×N/2 by dividing the second coding unit 1302 in a vertical direction and a horizontal direction. Three coding units 1314, or determine a third coding unit 1324 with a size of N/2×N/4.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过划分具有N/2×N尺寸的第二编码单元1312的宽度和高度中的至少一个来确定第三编码单元(例如,1304、1314和1324等)。也就是说,图像解码装置100可以通过以水平方向划分第二编码单元1312来确定具有N/2×N/2尺寸的第三编码单元1304或具有N/2×N/4尺寸的第三编码单元1324,或者可以通过以垂直方向和水平方向划分第二编码单元1312来确定具有N/4×N/2尺寸的第三编码单元1314。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine a third coding unit (eg, 1304, 1314, and 1324, etc.) by dividing at least one of a width and a height of the second coding unit 1312 having an N/2×N size. That is, the image decoding device 100 may determine the third encoding unit 1304 having a size of N/2×N/2 or the third encoding unit having a size of N/2×N/4 by dividing the second encoding unit 1312 in the horizontal direction. The unit 1324, or the third coding unit 1314 having a size of N/4×N/2 may be determined by dividing the second coding unit 1312 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100还可以通过划分具有N×N/2尺寸的第二编码单元1322的宽度和高度中的至少一个来确定第三编码单元(例如,1304、1314和1324等)。换言之,图像解码装置100可以通过以垂直方向划分第二编码单元1322来确定具有N/2×N/2尺寸的第三编码单元1304或N/4×N/2尺寸的第二编码单元1304,或者可以通过以垂直方向和水平方向划分第二编码单元1322来确定具有N/2×N/4尺寸的第三编码单元1324。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may further determine the third coding unit (for example, 1304, 1314, and 1324, etc.) by dividing at least one of the width and height of the second coding unit 1322 having a size of N×N/2 . In other words, the image decoding device 100 may determine the third coding unit 1304 having the size of N/2×N/2 or the second coding unit 1304 of the size of N/4×N/2 by dividing the second coding unit 1322 in the vertical direction, Or the third coding unit 1324 having a size of N/2×N/4 may be determined by dividing the second coding unit 1322 in a vertical direction and a horizontal direction.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以以水平方向或垂直方向划分具有正方形形状的编码单元(例如,1300、1302或1304)。例如,通过以垂直方向划分具有2N×2N尺寸的第一编码单元1300来确定具有N×2N尺寸的第一编码单元1310或以水平方向划分第一编码单元1300来确定具有2N×N尺寸的第一编码单元1320。根据一实施例,当深度基于编码单元的长度最大的边被确定的时,通过以水平方向或垂直方向划分具有2N×2N尺寸的第一编码单元1300而确定的编码单元的深度可以与第一编码单元1300的深度相同。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide a coding unit having a square shape (for example, 1300, 1302, or 1304) in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction. For example, the first coding unit 1310 having the N×2N size is determined by dividing the first coding unit 1300 having the 2N×2N size in the vertical direction or the first coding unit 1300 having the 2N×N size is determined by dividing the first coding unit 1300 in the horizontal direction. A coding unit 1320 . According to an embodiment, when the depth is determined based on the longest side of the coding unit, the depth of the coding unit determined by dividing the first coding unit 1300 having a size of 2N×2N in a horizontal direction or a vertical direction may be the same as that of the first coding unit. The coding units 1300 have the same depth.

根据一实施例,第三编码单元1314或1324的宽度和高度可以相当于第一编码单元1310或1320的1/4倍。当第一编码单元1310或1320的深度为D时,作为第一编码单元1310或1320的高度和宽度的1/2倍的第二编码单元1312或1322的深度可以为D+1,作为第一编码单元1310或1320的1/4倍的第三编码单元1314或1324的深度可以为D+2。According to an embodiment, the width and height of the third coding unit 1314 or 1324 may be equivalent to 1/4 times that of the first coding unit 1310 or 1320 . When the depth of the first coding unit 1310 or 1320 is D, the depth of the second coding unit 1312 or 1322, which is 1/2 times the height and width of the first coding unit 1310 or 1320, may be D+1, as the first A depth of the third coding unit 1314 or 1324 that is 1/4 times the coding unit 1310 or 1320 may be D+2.

图14图示根据一实施例的可根据编码单元的形状和尺寸确定的深度和用于区分编码单元的部分索引(part index,下称PID)。FIG. 14 illustrates a depth that may be determined according to a shape and size of a coding unit and a part index (PID) for distinguishing a coding unit, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过划分具有正方形形状的第一编码单元1400来确定具有各种形状的第二编码单元。参照图14,图像解码装置100可以根据划分形式模式信息以垂直方向和水平方向中的至少一个方向划分第一编码单元1400来确定第二编码单元1402a、1402b、1404a、1404b、1406a、1406b、1406c和1406d。就是说,图像解码装置100可以基于针对第一编码单元1400的划分形式模式信息来确定第二编码单元1402a、1402b、1404a、1404b、1406a、1406b、1406c、1406d。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine second coding units having various shapes by dividing the first coding unit 1400 having a square shape. Referring to FIG. 14 , the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding units 1402a, 1402b, 1404a, 1404b, 1406a, 1406b, 1406c by dividing the first coding unit 1400 in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction according to the division form mode information. and 1406d. That is, the image decoding device 100 may determine the second coding units 1402 a , 1402 b , 1404 a , 1404 b , 1406 a , 1406 b , 1406 c , 1406 d based on the division form mode information for the first coding unit 1400 .

根据一实施例,基于针对正方形形状的第一编码单元1400的划分形式模式信息而被确定的第二编码单元1402a、1402b、1404a、1404b、1406a、1406b、1406c和1406的深度可以基于长边的长度被确定。例如,正方形形状的第一编码单元1400的一个边的长度与非正方形形状的第二编码单元1402a、1402b、1404a和1404b的长边的长度相同,因此,第一编码单元1400和非正方形形状的第二编码单元1402a、1402b、1404a和1404b的深度可以被视为相同的D。相反地,当图像解码装置100基于划分形式模式信息将第一编码单元1400划分为四个正方形形状的第二编码单元1406a、1406b、1406c和1406d的时,正方形形状的第二编码单元1406a、1406b、1406c和1406d的一个边的长度为第一编码单元1400的一个边的1/2倍,因此,第二编码单元1406a、1406b、1406c和1406d的深度可以是比第一编码单元1400的深度D深一个深度的深度,即,D+1。According to an embodiment, the depths of the second coding units 1402a, 1402b, 1404a, 1404b, 1406a, 1406b, 1406c, and 1406 determined based on the division form mode information for the square-shaped first coding unit 1400 may be based on the The length is determined. For example, the length of one side of the square-shaped first coding unit 1400 is the same as the length of the long side of the non-square-shaped second coding units 1402a, 1402b, 1404a, and 1404b, therefore, the first coding unit 1400 and the non-square-shaped Depths of the second coding units 1402a, 1402b, 1404a, and 1404b may be regarded as the same D. Conversely, when the image decoding device 100 divides the first coding unit 1400 into four square-shaped second coding units 1406a, 1406b, 1406c, and 1406d based on the division form mode information, the square-shaped second coding units 1406a, 1406b The length of one side of , 1406c, and 1406d is 1/2 times the length of one side of the first coding unit 1400, therefore, the depth of the second coding unit 1406a, 1406b, 1406c, and 1406d may be deeper than the depth D of the first coding unit 1400 One depth deeper, ie, D+1.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以根据划分形式模式信息将长度大于宽度的第一编码单元1410以水平方向划分为多个第二编码单元1412a、1412b、1414a、1414b和1414c。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以根据划分形式模式信息将宽度大于长度的第一编码单元1420以水平方向划分为多个第二编码单元1422a、1422b、1424a、1424b和1424c。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 1410 having a length greater than its width into a plurality of second coding units 1412a, 1412b, 1414a, 1414b, and 1414c in the horizontal direction according to the division mode information. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 1420 having a width greater than its length into a plurality of second coding units 1422a, 1422b, 1424a, 1424b, and 1424c in the horizontal direction according to the division mode information.

根据一实施例,根据针对非正方形形状的第一编码单元1410或1420的划分形式模式信息而被确定的第二编码单元1412a、1412b、1414a、1414b、1414c、1422a、1422b、1424a、1424b和1406的深度可以基于长边的长度被确定。例如,正方形形状的第二编码单元1412a、1412b的一个边的长度为高度大于宽度的非正方形形状的第一编码单元1410的一个边的长度的1/2倍,因此,正方形形状的第二编码单元1412a和1412b的深度为比非正方形形状的第一编码单元1410的深度D深一个深度的深度D+1。According to an embodiment, the second coding units 1412a, 1412b, 1414a, 1414b, 1414c, 1422a, 1422b, 1424a, 1424b, and 1406 determined according to the division form mode information for the non-square-shaped first coding unit 1410 or 1420 The depth can be determined based on the length of the long side. For example, the length of one side of the square-shaped second coding unit 1412a, 1412b is 1/2 times the length of one side of the non-square-shaped first coding unit 1410 whose height is greater than the width, therefore, the square-shaped second coding unit The units 1412 a and 1412 b have a depth of one depth D+1 deeper than a depth D of the non-square-shaped first coding unit 1410 .

进而,图像解码装置100可以基于划分形式模式信息将非正方形形状的第一编码单元1410划分为奇数个的第二编码单元1414a、1414b和1414c。奇数个的第二编码单元1414a、1414b和1414c可以包括非正方形形状的第二编码单元1414a和1414c及正方形形状的第二编码单元1414b。在这种情况下,非正方形形状的第二编码单元1414a和1414c的长边的长度和正方形形状的第二编码单元1414b的一个边的长度等于第一编码单元1410的一个边的长度的1/2倍,因此,第二编码单元1414a、1414b和1414c的深度为比第一编码单元1410的深度D深一个深度的深度D+1。图像解码装置100可以按照与确定与第一编码单元1410有关的编码单元的深度的所述方式对应的方式确定与宽度大于高度的非正方形形状的第一编码单元1420有关的编码单元的深度。Further, the image decoding device 100 may divide the non-square-shaped first coding unit 1410 into an odd number of second coding units 1414a, 1414b, and 1414c based on the division form mode information. The odd number of second coding units 1414a, 1414b, and 1414c may include non-square-shaped second coding units 1414a and 1414c and a square-shaped second coding unit 1414b. In this case, the length of the long sides of the non-square-shaped second coding units 1414a and 1414c and the length of one side of the square-shaped second coding unit 1414b are equal to 1/1 of the length of one side of the first coding unit 1410. 2 times, therefore, the depths of the second coding units 1414 a , 1414 b , and 1414 c are depth D+1 which is one depth deeper than the depth D of the first coding unit 1410 . The image decoding device 100 may determine a depth of a coding unit related to the non-square-shaped first coding unit 1420 having a width greater than a height in a manner corresponding to the manner of determining a depth of a coding unit related to the first coding unit 1410 .

根据一实施例,对于确定用于区分被划分的编码单元的索引PID而言,当奇数个划分的编码单元的尺寸彼此不同时,图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元之间的尺寸比例来确定索引。参照图14,在划分的奇数个的编码单元1414a、1414b和1414c中,位于中央的编码单元1414b的宽度可以与其他编码单元1414a和1414c的宽度相同,然而,其高度可以等于其他编码单元1414a和1414c的高度的两倍。换言之,在这种情况下,位于中央的编码单元1414b可以包括两个其他编码单元1414a和1414c。因此,根据扫描顺序,若位于中央的编码单元1414的部分索引PID为1,位于下一个顺序的编码单元1414c的部分索引可以是从1增加2的3。换言之,有可存在索引值的不连续性。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于用于区分划分的编码单元的索引的不连续性是否存在,确定划分的奇数个的编码单元是否具有彼此相同的尺寸。According to an embodiment, for determining the index PID for distinguishing the divided coding units, when the sizes of the odd divided coding units are different from each other, the image decoding device 100 may determine the index based on the size ratio between the coding units. . Referring to FIG. 14 , among divided odd-numbered coding units 1414a, 1414b, and 1414c, a centrally located coding unit 1414b may have the same width as other coding units 1414a and 1414c, however, its height may be equal to other coding units 1414a and 1414c. Twice the height of 1414c. In other words, in this case, the centrally located encoding unit 1414b may include two other encoding units 1414a and 1414c. Therefore, according to the scanning order, if the partial index PID of the coding unit 1414 located in the center is 1, the partial index of the coding unit 1414c located in the next order may be 3 which increases from 1 to 2. In other words, there can be discontinuities in index values. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether split odd-numbered coding units have the same size as each other based on whether discontinuity of an index for distinguishing split coding units exists.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于用于区分通过将当前编码单元划分来确定的多个编码单元的索引的值而确定是否使用特定划分形式进行划分。参照图14,图像解码装置100可以通过划分高度大于宽度的矩形形状的第一编码单元1410来确定偶数个的编码单元1412a和1412b或确定奇数个的编码单元1414a、1414b和1414c。图像解码装置100可以使用各编码单元的PID来区分多个编码单元。根据一实施例,可以从各编码单元中的预定位置的样点(例如,左侧上端的样点)获得PID。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether to split using a specific split form based on a value of an index for distinguishing a plurality of coding units determined by splitting a current coding unit. Referring to FIG. 14 , the image decoding device 100 may determine an even number of coding units 1412 a and 1412 b or an odd number of coding units 1414 a , 1414 b , and 1414 c by dividing a rectangular-shaped first coding unit 1410 having a height greater than a width. The image decoding device 100 may distinguish a plurality of coding units using a PID of each coding unit. According to an embodiment, the PID may be obtained from samples at predetermined positions (for example, samples at the upper left end) in each coding unit.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用用于区分编码单元的索引来确定被划分而确定的编码单元中的在预定位置的编码单元。根据一实施例,当针对高度大于宽度的矩形形状的第一编码单元1410的划分形式信息指示第一编码单元1410被划分为三个编码单元时,图像解码装置100可以将第一编码单元1410划分为三个编码单元1414a、1414b和1414c。图像解码装置100可以分配针对三个编码单元1414a、1414b和1414c各自的索引。图像解码装置100可以对关于各编码单元的索引进行比较以在被划分的奇数个的编码单元中确定中央编码单元。图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元的索引将具有与索引的中央值对应的索引的编码单元1414b确定为通过划分第一编码单元1410来确定的编码单元中的位于中央的编码单元。根据一实施例,对于确定用于区分划分的编码单元的索引而言,当编码单元的尺寸彼此不同的时,图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元之间的尺寸比例来确定索引。参照图14,通过划分第一编码单元1410而生成的编码单元1414b的宽度与其他编码单元1414a和1414c的宽度相同,但其高度可以是高度同的其他编码单元1414a和1414c的高度的两倍。在这种情况下,若位于中央的编码单元1414b的PID为1,位于下一个顺序的编码单元1414的索引为增加2的3。如在这种情况下,当索引均匀地增加时增幅改变时,图像解码装置100可以确定通过使用包括具有与其他编码单元不同尺寸的编码单元的多个编码单元来进行划分。根据一实施例,当划分形式模式信息指示以奇数个的编码单元进行划分时,图像解码装置100可以使用在奇数个编码单元中的具有预定位置的编码单元(例如,中央编码单元)具有与其他编码单元的尺寸不同的尺寸的形式将当前编码单元划分。在这种情况下,图像解码装置100可以使用关于编码单元的索引PID来确定具有不同尺寸的中央编码单元。然而,上述的索引、所要确定的预定位置的编码单元的尺寸或位置是为了说明一实施例而预定的,编码单元的确定不应被解释为受到限制,应解释为可以使用各种索引、编码单元的位置及尺寸。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine a coding unit at a predetermined position among coding units determined by being split using an index for distinguishing coding units. According to an embodiment, when the division form information for the rectangular-shaped first coding unit 1410 whose height is larger than the width indicates that the first coding unit 1410 is divided into three coding units, the image decoding device 100 may divide the first coding unit 1410 into three coding units. There are three coding units 1414a, 1414b and 1414c. The image decoding device 100 may allocate respective indexes for the three coding units 1414a, 1414b, and 1414c. The image decoding device 100 may compare indexes regarding respective coding units to determine a central coding unit among divided odd-numbered coding units. The image decoding device 100 may determine a coding unit 1414b having an index corresponding to a central value of the index as a centrally located coding unit among coding units determined by splitting the first coding unit 1410 based on the index of the coding unit. According to an embodiment, for determining an index for distinguishing split coding units, when sizes of coding units are different from each other, the image decoding device 100 may determine the index based on a size ratio between coding units. Referring to FIG. 14 , a coding unit 1414b generated by dividing the first coding unit 1410 has the same width as other coding units 1414a and 1414c but may be twice as high as other coding units 1414a and 1414c of the same height. In this case, if the PID of the encoding unit 1414b located in the center is 1, the index of the encoding unit 1414 located in the next order is 3 which is incremented by 2. As in this case, when the increment changes when the index uniformly increases, the image decoding device 100 may determine to split by using a plurality of coding units including coding units having different sizes from other coding units. According to an embodiment, when the division form mode information indicates division by an odd number of coding units, the image decoding device 100 may use a coding unit having a predetermined position (for example, a central coding unit) among the odd number of coding units having The size of the coding unit divides the current coding unit in different sizes. In this case, the image decoding device 100 may determine a central coding unit having a different size using an index PID with respect to a coding unit. However, the above-mentioned index, the size or position of the coding unit at the predetermined position to be determined are predetermined for illustrating an embodiment, and the determination of the coding unit should not be interpreted as being limited, and it should be interpreted as that various indexes, coding units, etc. can be used. The location and size of the unit.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用开始编码单元的递归性划分的预定的数据单元。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may use a predetermined data unit to start recursive splitting of a coding unit.

图15图示根据一实施例的基于在画面中包括的多个预定的编码单元来确定多个编码单元。FIG. 15 illustrates determining a plurality of coding units based on a plurality of predetermined coding units included in a picture, according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,预定的数据单元可以被定义为使用划分形式模式信息开始在其中递归地划分编码单元的数据单元。换言之,预定的数据单元可以相当于在确定划分当前画面的多个编码单元的过程中使用的最上位深度的编码单元。在下文中,为了便于说明,将这些预定的数据单元指称为基准数据单元。According to an embodiment, a predetermined data unit may be defined as a data unit in which a coding unit is recursively divided starting using the division form pattern information. In other words, the predetermined data unit may be equivalent to a coding unit of the highest bit depth used in determining a plurality of coding units into which a current picture is divided. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, these predetermined data units are referred to as reference data units.

根据一实施例,基准数据单元可以指示预定的尺寸和形状。根据一实施例,基准编码单元可以包括M×N的样点。这里,M和N可以彼此相同,也可以是被表现为2的乘数的整数。换言之,基准数据单元可以显示出正方形或非正方形的形状,以后可以被划分为整数个的编码单元。According to an embodiment, the reference data unit may indicate a predetermined size and shape. According to an embodiment, the reference CU may include M×N samples. Here, M and N may be the same as each other, or may be an integer expressed as a multiplier of 2. In other words, the reference data unit can exhibit a square or non-square shape, and can be divided into an integer number of coding units later.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以将当前画面划分为多个基准数据单元。根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用针对各个基准数据单元的划分形式模式信息来划分用于划分当前画面的多个基准数据单元。基准数据单元的这种划分过程可以对应于使用四树(quad-tree)结构的划分过程。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide the current picture into a plurality of reference data units. According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may divide a plurality of reference data units for dividing a current picture using division form pattern information for each reference data unit. Such a division process of the reference data unit may correspond to a division process using a quad-tree structure.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以预先确定包括在当前画面中的基准数据单元可以具有的最小的尺寸。由此,图像解码装置100可以确定具有等于或大于最小尺寸的各种尺寸的基准数据单元,且可以基于所确定的基准数据单元使用划分形式模式信息来确定至少一个编码单元。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine in advance a minimum size that a reference data unit included in a current picture may have. Accordingly, the image decoding device 100 may determine reference data units having various sizes equal to or greater than the minimum size, and may determine at least one coding unit using the split form mode information based on the determined reference data units.

参照图15,图像解码装置100既可以使用正方形形状的基准编码单元1500,也可以使用非正方形形状的基准编码单元1502。根据一实施例,基准编码单元的形状和尺寸可以由可包括至少一个基准编码单元的各种数据单元(例如,序列(sequence)、画面(picture)、条带(slice)、条带片段(slice segment)和最大编码单元等)所确定。Referring to FIG. 15 , the image decoding device 100 may use either a square-shaped reference coding unit 1500 or a non-square-shaped reference coding unit 1502 . According to an embodiment, the shape and size of the reference coding unit may be determined by various data units (for example, sequence, picture, slice, slice) that may include at least one reference coding unit. segment) and the largest coding unit, etc.).

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100的接收器(未示出)可以根据所述各种数据单元从比特流获得关于基准编码单元的形状的信息和关于基准编码单元的尺寸的信息中的至少一个。通过图3的当前编码单元300被划分的过程详细地描述了在正方形形状的基准编码单元1500中包括的至少一个编码单元被确定的过程,而且通过图4的当前编码单元400或450被划分的过程详细地描述了在非正方形形状的基准编码单元1502中包括的至少一个编码单元的过程,故不再赘述。According to an embodiment, a receiver (not shown) of the image decoding device 100 may obtain at least one of information on the shape of the reference coding unit and information on the size of the reference coding unit from the bitstream according to the various data units. . The process of being divided by the current coding unit 300 of FIG. 3 describes in detail the process of determining at least one coding unit included in the square-shaped reference coding unit 1500, and the process of being divided by the current coding unit 400 or 450 of FIG. 4 is described in detail. The process describes in detail the process of at least one coding unit included in the non-square-shaped reference coding unit 1502 , so details are not repeated here.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用用于识别基准编码单元的尺寸和形状的索引以根据基于预定条件被预定的一些数据单元确定基准编码单元的尺寸和形状。换言之,针对作为所述各种数据单元(例如,序列、画面、条带、条带片段和最大编码单元等)中满足预定条件(例如,尺寸小于或等于条带的数据单元)的数据单元的每个条带、条带段、最大编码单元,接收器(未示出)可以从比特流仅获得用于识别基准编码单元的尺寸及形状的索引。图像解码装置100可以使用索引对满足所述预定条件的每个数据单元确定基准数据单元的尺寸和形状。当根据相对小的数据单元从比特流获得并使用关于基准编码单元的形状的信息和关于基准编码单元的尺寸的信息时,比特流的使用效率可能不好,因此,可以仅获得并使用所述索引,而不是直接获得关于基准编码单元的形状的信息和关于基准编码单元的尺寸的信息。在这种情况下,与指示基准编码单元的尺寸和形状的索引对应的基准编码单元的尺寸和形状中的至少一个可以是预定的。换言之,图像解码装置100可以基于索引选择预定的基准编码单元的尺寸和形状中的至少一个以确定在用作获得索引的基准的数据单元中包括的基准编码单元的尺寸和形状中的至少一个。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may use an index for identifying the size and shape of the reference coding unit to determine the size and shape of the reference coding unit from some data units predetermined based on predetermined conditions. In other words, for data units satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, a data unit whose size is smaller than or equal to a slice) among the various data units (for example, a sequence, a picture, a slice, a slice fragment, and a maximum coding unit, etc.) For each slice, slice segment, LCU, a receiver (not shown) can obtain only an index for identifying the size and shape of a reference CU from a bitstream. The image decoding device 100 may determine the size and shape of the reference data unit for each data unit satisfying the predetermined condition using the index. When the information on the shape of the reference coding unit and the information on the size of the reference coding unit are obtained and used from the bitstream according to relatively small data units, the usage efficiency of the bitstream may not be good, and therefore, only the index, instead of directly obtaining information about the shape of the reference CU and information about the size of the reference CU. In this case, at least one of the size and shape of the reference coding unit corresponding to the index indicating the size and shape of the reference coding unit may be predetermined. In other words, the image decoding device 100 may select at least one of the size and shape of a predetermined reference coding unit based on the index to determine at least one of the size and shape of the reference coding unit included in the data unit used as a reference for obtaining the index.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以使用在一个最大编码单元中包括的至少一个基准编码单元。换言之,划分图像的最大编码单元可以包括至少一个基准编码单元,且可以通过各个基准编码单元的递归划分过程确定编码单元。根据一实施例,最大编码单元的宽度和高度中的至少一个可以相当于基准编码单元的宽度和高度中的至少一个的整数倍。根据一实施例,基准编码单元的尺寸可以是将最大编码单元根据四树结构划分n次而获得的尺寸。换言之,图像解码装置100可以通过将最大编码单元根据四树结构划分n次来确定基准编码单元,且可以根据各种实施例基于块形状信息和关于划分形式模式的信息中的至少一个划分基准编码单元。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may use at least one reference coding unit included in one maximum coding unit. In other words, the maximum coding unit of the divided image may include at least one reference coding unit, and the coding unit may be determined through a recursive division process of each reference coding unit. According to an embodiment, at least one of the width and the height of the LCU may be equivalent to an integer multiple of at least one of the width and the height of the reference CU. According to an embodiment, the size of the reference coding unit may be a size obtained by dividing the largest coding unit n times according to the quad-tree structure. In other words, the image decoding device 100 may determine the reference coding unit by dividing the maximum coding unit n times according to the quad-tree structure, and may divide the reference coding unit based on at least one of block shape information and information on the division form mode according to various embodiments. unit.

图16图示根据一实施例的作为确定在画面1600中包括的基准编码单元的确定顺序的基准的处理块。FIG. 16 illustrates processing blocks as a reference for determining a determination order of reference coding units included in a screen 1600 according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以确定用于划分画面的至少一个处理块。处理块为包括划分图像的至少一个基准编码单元的数据单元,在处理块中包括的至少一个基准编码单元是可以按照特定顺序确定的。换言之,在各个处理块中确定的至少一个基准编码单元的确定顺序可以相当于可以确定基准编码单元的各种顺序的类型之一,在各个处理块中确定的基准编码单元的确定顺序可以根据各处理块不同。在每个处理块中确定的基准编码单元的确定顺序可以是光栅扫描(raster scan)、Z扫描(Z-scan)、N扫描(N-scan)、右上对角扫描(up-right diagonal scan)、水平扫描(horizontal scan)和垂直扫描(verticalscan),然而,可以确定的顺序不应被解释为限于所述扫描顺序。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine at least one processing block for dividing a picture. A processing block is a data unit including at least one reference coding unit of a divided image, and the at least one reference coding unit included in the processing block can be determined in a specific order. In other words, the determination order of at least one reference coding unit determined in each processing block may correspond to one of the types in which the reference coding units may be determined, and the determination order of the reference coding units determined in each processing block may be determined according to each Processing blocks are different. The determination order of the reference coding unit determined in each processing block may be raster scan, Z-scan (Z-scan), N-scan (N-scan), upper-right diagonal scan (up-right diagonal scan) , horizontal scan, and vertical scan, however, the order that can be determined should not be construed as being limited to the scan order.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以通过获得关于处理块的尺寸的信息来确定被包括在图像中的至少一个处理块的尺寸。图像解码装置100可以通过从比特流中获得关于处理块的信息来确定在图像中包括的至少一个处理块的尺寸。这种处理块的尺寸可以是关于处理块的尺寸的信息所指示的数据单元的预定的尺寸。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the size of at least one processing block included in the image by obtaining information on the size of the processing block. The image decoding device 100 may determine a size of at least one processing block included in an image by obtaining information on the processing block from a bitstream. The size of such a processing block may be a predetermined size of a data unit indicated by the information on the size of the processing block.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100的接收器(未示出)可以从比特流中根据每个预定的数据单元获得关于处理块的尺寸的信息。例如,关于处理块的尺寸的信息是可以根据图像、序列、画面、条带、条带片段等的数据单元从比特流中获得的。换言之,接收器(未示出)可以根据所述多个数据单元分别从比特流中获得关于处理块的尺寸的信息,图像解码装置100可以使用所获得的关于处理块的尺寸的信息来确定用于划分画面的至少一个处理块的尺寸,这种处理块的尺寸可以是基准编码单元的整数倍的尺寸。According to an embodiment, a receiver (not shown) of the image decoding device 100 may obtain information on the size of the processing block according to each predetermined data unit from the bit stream. For example, information about the size of a processing block can be obtained from the bitstream in terms of data units of images, sequences, pictures, slices, slice segments, and the like. In other words, the receiver (not shown) can respectively obtain information about the size of the processing block from the bitstream according to the plurality of data units, and the image decoding device 100 can use the obtained information about the size of the processing block to determine the Depending on the size of at least one processing block of the divided picture, the size of the processing block may be an integer multiple of the size of the reference coding unit.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以确定包括在画面1600中的处理块1602和1612的尺寸。例如,图像解码装置100可以基于从比特流获得的关于处理块的尺寸的信息来确定处理块的尺寸。参照图16,图像解码装置100可以根据一实施例将处理块1602和1612的横向尺寸确定为基准编码单元的横向尺寸的四倍,并将纵向尺寸确定为基准编码单元的纵向尺寸的四倍。图像解码装置100可以确定在至少一个处理块内确定至少一个基准编码单元的顺序。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the sizes of the processing blocks 1602 and 1612 included in the picture 1600 . For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine the size of the processing block based on information on the size of the processing block obtained from the bitstream. Referring to FIG. 16 , the image decoding device 100 may determine the horizontal size of the processing blocks 1602 and 1612 to be four times the horizontal size of the reference coding unit and determine the vertical size to be four times the vertical size of the reference coding unit according to an embodiment. The image decoding device 100 may determine an order in which at least one reference coding unit is determined within at least one processing block.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以基于处理块的尺寸来确定被包括在画面1600中的各个处理块1602和1612,且可以确定被包括在处理块1602和1612中的至少一个基准编码单元的确定顺序。根据一实施例,对基准编码单元的确定可以包括对基准编码单元的尺寸的确定。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may determine the respective processing blocks 1602 and 1612 included in the picture 1600 based on the sizes of the processing blocks, and may determine the size of at least one reference coding unit included in the processing blocks 1602 and 1612. Determine the order. According to an embodiment, determining the reference CU may include determining a size of the reference CU.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以从比特流中获得关于在至少一个处理块中包括的至少一个基准编码单元的确定顺序的信息,且可以基于所获得的关于确定顺序的信息来确定至少一个基准编码单元被确定的顺序。关于确定顺序的信息是可以根据在处理块内的基准编码单元被确定的顺序或方向确定的。换言之,基准编码单元被确定的顺序是可以在每个处理块中独立地确定的。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may obtain information about a determined order of at least one reference coding unit included in at least one processing block from a bitstream, and may determine at least one based on the obtained information about the determined order. The order in which reference coding units are determined. The information on the determination order may be determined according to the order or direction in which the reference coding units within the processing block are determined. In other words, the order in which the reference CUs are determined can be determined independently in each processing block.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以根据每个特定数据单元从比特流中获得关于基准编码单元的确定顺序的信息。例如,接收器(未示出)可以根据图像、序列、画面、条带、条带片段、处理块等的每个数据单元从比特流中获得关于基准编码单元的确定顺序的信息。关于基准编码单元的确定顺序的信息指示在处理块内的基准编码单元的确定顺序,因此,可以根据包括整数个的处理块的每个特定数据单元获得关于确定顺序的信息。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may obtain information about a determined order of reference coding units from a bitstream according to each specific data unit. For example, a receiver (not shown) may obtain information about a determined order of reference coding units from a bitstream according to each data unit of an image, sequence, picture, slice, slice segment, processing block, and the like. The information on the determined order of the reference coding units indicates the determined order of the reference coding units within the processing block, and thus, the information on the determined order may be obtained according to each specific data unit including an integer number of processing blocks.

图像解码装置100可以基于根据一实施例确定的顺序来确定至少一个基准编码单元。The image decoding device 100 may determine at least one reference coding unit based on an order determined according to an embodiment.

根据一实施例,接收器(未示出)可以从比特流中获得作为与处理块1602和1612有关的信息的关于基准编码单元的确定顺序的信息,图像解码装置100可以确定在所述处理块1602和1612中包括的至少一个基准编码单元的顺序,且可以基于编码单元的确定顺序来确定在画面1600中包括的至少一个基准编码单元。参照图16,图像解码装置100可以确定与各个处理块1602和1612有关的至少一个基准编码单元的确定顺序1604和1614。例如,当根据每个处理块而获得关于基准编码单元的确定顺序的信息时,与各个处理块1602和1612有关的基准编码单元的确定顺序可以根据每个处理块不同。当与处理块1602有关的基准编码单元的确定顺序1604为光栅扫描(raster scan)顺序时,在处理块1602中包括的基准编码单元可以根据光栅扫描顺序而被确定。相反,当与其他处理块1612有关的基准编码单元的确定顺序1614是光栅扫描顺序的倒序时,在处理块1612中包括的基准编码单元是以根据光栅扫描顺序的倒序而被确定。According to an embodiment, a receiver (not shown) may obtain, from a bitstream, information on a determined order of reference coding units as information on processing blocks 1602 and 1612, and the image decoding device 100 may determine the The order of at least one reference coding unit included in 1602 and 1612, and the at least one reference coding unit included in the picture 1600 may be determined based on the determined order of the coding units. Referring to FIG. 16 , the image decoding device 100 may determine determination orders 1604 and 1614 of at least one reference coding unit related to the respective processing blocks 1602 and 1612 . For example, when information on the determination order of reference coding units is obtained according to each processing block, the determination order of reference coding units related to the respective processing blocks 1602 and 1612 may be different according to each processing block. When the determination order 1604 of the reference coding units related to the processing block 1602 is a raster scan order, the reference coding units included in the processing block 1602 may be determined according to the raster scan order. On the contrary, when the determination order 1614 of the reference coding units related to other processing blocks 1612 is the reverse order of the raster scan order, the reference coding units included in the processing block 1612 are determined according to the reverse order of the raster scan order.

图像解码装置100可以根据一实施例对所确定的至少一个编码单元进行解码。图像解码装置100可以根据通过上述的实施例被确定的基准编码单元对图像进行解码。对基准编码单元进行解码的方法可以包括对图像进行解码的各种方法。The image decoding device 100 may decode the determined at least one coding unit according to an embodiment. The image decoding device 100 may decode an image according to the reference coding unit determined through the above-mentioned embodiments. A method of decoding a reference coding unit may include various methods of decoding an image.

根据一实施例,图像解码装置100可以从比特流中获得且使用指示当前编码单元的形状的块形状信息或指示划分当前编码单元的方法的划分形式模式信息。划分形式模式信息可以包括在与各种数据单元有关的比特流中。例如,图像解码装置100可以使用在序列参数集(sequence parameter set)、画面参数集(picture parameter set)、视频参数集(video parameter set)、条带头(slice header)和条带片段头(slice segment header)中包括的划分形式模式信息。进而,图像解码装置100可以根据最大编码单元、基准编码单元和处理块从比特流获得与划分形式模式信息对应的语法元素并使用该语法元素。According to an embodiment, the image decoding device 100 may obtain and use block shape information indicating a shape of a current coding unit or split form mode information indicating a method of splitting the current coding unit from a bitstream. Partition form pattern information may be included in a bitstream related to various data units. For example, the image decoding device 100 can be used in sequence parameter set (sequence parameter set), picture parameter set (picture parameter set), video parameter set (video parameter set), slice header (slice header) and slice segment header (slice segment header) includes the division form pattern information. Furthermore, the image decoding device 100 may obtain a syntax element corresponding to the division form mode information from a bitstream according to the maximum coding unit, the reference coding unit, and the processing block and use the syntax element.

以下,详细描述根据本公开的一实施例的确定划分规则的方法。Hereinafter, a method for determining division rules according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described in detail.

图像解码装置100可以确定图像的划分规则。划分规则可在图像解码装置100和图像编码装置150之间预先确定。图像解码装置100可以基于从比特流获得的信息来确定图像的划分规则。图像解码装置100可以基于从序列参数集(sequence parameter set)、画面参数集(picture parameter set)、视频参数集(video parameter set)、条带头(sliceheader)和条带片段头(slice segment header)中的至少一个获得的信息来确定划分规则。图像解码装置100可以根据帧、条带、时域层(Temporal layer)、最大编码单元或编码单元而不同地确定划分规则。The image decoding device 100 may determine a division rule of an image. The division rule may be predetermined between the image decoding device 100 and the image encoding device 150 . The image decoding device 100 may determine division rules of an image based on information obtained from a bitstream. The image decoding device 100 can be based on the sequence parameter set (sequence parameter set), picture parameter set (picture parameter set), video parameter set (video parameter set), slice header (slice header) and slice segment header (slice segment header) At least one of the obtained information is used to determine the division rule. The image decoding device 100 may differently determine splitting rules according to frames, slices, temporal layers, maximum coding units, or coding units.

图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元的块形状来确定划分规则。块形状可以包括编码单元的尺寸、形状、宽度与高度的比例和方向。图像编码装置150和图像解码装置100可以预先确定基于编码单元的块形状来确定划分规则。然而,不限于此。图像解码装置100可以基于从图像解码装置150接收的比特流中获得的信息来确定划分规则。The image decoding device 100 may determine a split rule based on a block shape of a coding unit. The block shape may include the size, shape, width-to-height ratio, and orientation of the coding unit. The image encoding device 150 and the image decoding device 100 may determine in advance a division rule based on a block shape of a coding unit. However, it is not limited to this. The image decoding device 100 may determine division rules based on information obtained from the bitstream received by the image decoding device 150 .

编码单元的形状可以包括正方形(square)及非正方形(non-square)。当编码单元的宽度和高度彼此相同时,图像解码装置100可以将编码单元的形状确定为正方形。并且,当编码单元的宽度和高度的长度彼此不同时,图像解码装置100可以将编码单元的形状确定为非正方形。The shape of the coding unit may include square and non-square. When the width and height of the coding unit are the same as each other, the image decoding device 100 may determine the shape of the coding unit as a square. And, when the lengths of the width and the height of the coding unit are different from each other, the image decoding device 100 may determine the shape of the coding unit to be non-square.

编码单元的尺寸可以包括4×4、8×4、4×8、8×8、16×4、16×8、...、256×256的各种尺寸。编码单元的尺寸是可以根据编码单元的长边的长度、短边的长度或面积而分类的。图像解码装置100可以对被分类成相同群组的编码单元应用相同的划分规则。例如,图像解码装置100可以将具有长边的长度相同的编码单元分类成相同的尺寸。并且,图像解码装置100可以对具有相同的长边长度的编码单元应用相同的划分规则。The size of the coding unit may include various sizes of 4×4, 8×4, 4×8, 8×8, 16×4, 16×8, . . . , 256×256. The size of the coding unit can be classified according to the length of the long side, the length of the short side or the area of the coding unit. The image decoding device 100 may apply the same split rule to coding units classified into the same group. For example, the image decoding device 100 may classify coding units having the same length of long sides into the same size. And, the image decoding device 100 may apply the same split rule to coding units having the same long side length.

编码单元的宽度与高度的比例可以包括1:2、2:1、1:4、4:1、1:8、8:1、1:16或16:1等。并且,编码单元的方向可以包括水平方向和垂直方向。水平方向可以指示编码单元的宽度的长度大于高度的长度的情况。垂直方向可以指示编码单元的宽度的长度小于高度的长度的情况。The ratio of the width to the height of the coding unit may include 1:2, 2:1, 1:4, 4:1, 1:8, 8:1, 1:16, or 16:1. And, the direction of the coding unit may include a horizontal direction and a vertical direction. The horizontal direction may indicate a case where the length of the width of the coding unit is greater than the length of the height. The vertical direction may indicate a case where the length of the width of the coding unit is smaller than the length of the height.

图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元的尺寸适应性地确定划分规则。图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元的尺寸不同地确定可允许的划分形式模式。例如,图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元的尺寸确定是否可以允许划分。图像解码装置100可以根据编码单元的大小确定划分方向。图像解码装置100可以根据编码单元的大小来确定可允许的划分类型。The image decoding device 100 may adaptively determine the split rule based on the size of the coding unit. The image decoding device 100 may variously determine allowable split form modes based on the size of a coding unit. For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether splitting may be allowed based on the size of the coding unit. The image decoding device 100 may determine a split direction according to a size of a coding unit. The image decoding device 100 may determine allowable split types according to the size of the coding unit.

基于编码单元的尺寸确定划分规则可以是在图像编码装置2300和图像解码装置100之间预先确定的划分规则。并且,图像解码装置100可以基于从比特流获得的信息确定划分规则。Determining the division rule based on the size of the coding unit may be a division rule predetermined between the image encoding device 2300 and the image decoding device 100 . And, the image decoding device 100 may determine a division rule based on information obtained from a bitstream.

图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元的位置适应性地确定划分规则。图像解码装置100可以基于编码单元在图像中占据的位置适应性地确定划分规则。The image decoding device 100 may adaptively determine a split rule based on a location of a coding unit. The image decoding device 100 may adaptively determine a division rule based on a position that a coding unit occupies in an image.

并且,图像解码装置100可以确定划分规则以防止通过彼此不同的划分途径生成的编码单元具有相同的块形状。然而,并不限于此,通过彼此不同的划分途径生成的编码单元可以具有相同的块形状。通过彼此不同的划分途径生成的编码单元可以具有彼此不同的解码处理顺序。已经结合图12描述了解码处理顺序,故不再赘述。And, the image decoding device 100 may determine a split rule to prevent coding units generated through split paths different from each other from having the same block shape. However, not limited thereto, coding units generated through different split approaches from each other may have the same block shape. Coding units generated through split approaches different from each other may have decoding processing orders different from each other. The decoding processing sequence has already been described in conjunction with FIG. 12 , so details are not repeated here.

在下文中,参考图17至18,将详细描述基于当前块中的当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个来确定用于当前样点的滤波器,并且基于所确定的滤波器执行帧内预测的图像编码/解码方法和装置。Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 18 , the determination of the filter for the current sample based on at least one of the distance between the current sample in the current block and the reference sample and the size of the current block will be described in detail, and based on The determined filter performs an image encoding/decoding method and apparatus for intra prediction.

图17为用于说明根据实施例的帧内预测模式的图。FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an intra prediction mode according to an embodiment.

参考图17,根据实施例的帧内预测模式可以包括平面模式(模式0)和直流模式(模式1)。另外,帧内预测模式可以包括具有预测方向的角度模式(模式2至66)。角度模式可以包括对角线模式(模式2或66)、水平模式(模式18)和垂直模式(模式50)。Referring to FIG. 17 , intra prediction modes according to an embodiment may include a planar mode (mode 0 ) and a DC mode (mode 1 ). In addition, the intra prediction modes may include angle modes (modes 2 to 66) with prediction directions. Angle patterns may include diagonal patterns (pattern 2 or 66), horizontal patterns (pattern 18), and vertical patterns (pattern 50).

在上文中,已经参考图17描述了根据实施例的帧内预测模式,但不限于此,并且可以通过添加新的帧内预测模式或者减去现有的帧内预测模式来具有各种形状的帧内预测模式,并且本领域的普通技术人可以理解的是,每个帧内预测模式的模式号可以因情况而异。In the above, the intra prediction mode according to the embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 17 , but is not limited thereto, and can have various shapes by adding a new intra prediction mode or subtracting an existing intra prediction mode. Intra-frame prediction mode, and those skilled in the art can understand that the mode number of each intra-frame prediction mode may vary from case to case.

图18为用于说明根据本公开的实施例,图像解码装置基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离和当前块的尺寸中的至少一个,通过使用不同的滤波器来产生当前样点的预测样点的方法。18 is a diagram for explaining that according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, an image decoding device generates a current sample by using different filters based on at least one of the distance between the current sample and the reference sample and the size of the current block. Method for predicting sample points.

参考图18,图像解码装置100可以通过使用参考样点1820来产生关于当前块中的样点的预测样点值,以便对当前块1800执行帧内预测。Referring to FIG. 18 , the image decoding device 100 may generate prediction sample values with respect to samples in a current block by using reference samples 1820 in order to perform intra prediction on the current block 1800 .

例如,图像解码装置100可以通过使用与从当前样点1810的当前块1800的帧内预测模式的预测方向的延长线1830交叉的参考样点和其相邻的样点来根据式1确定当前块1800的当前样点1810的预测样点值px,y。这里,x,y可以基于当前块的左上侧样点的位置是指当前样点的x坐标和y坐标。For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine the current block according to Eq. 1800 is the predicted sample point value px,y of the current sample point 1810 . Here, x and y may refer to the x coordinate and y coordinate of the current sample point based on the position of the upper left sample point of the current block.

[式1][Formula 1]

px,y=fk,0*a-1+fk,1*a0+fk,2*a1+fk,3*a2 p x, y = f k, 0 * a -1 + f k, 1 * a 0 + f k, 2 * a 1 + f k, 3 * a 2

此时,fk,i可以是指对包括M+1个(M为整数)滤波器的滤波器集中的第k+1个滤波器的第i+1个(0<=i<=3)滤波器系数。a0可以是指与从当前样点1810的延长线1830交叉的参考样点的样点值,并且a-1可以是指参考样点的样点值,其直接位于与从当前样点1810的延长线1830交叉的参考样点的左侧,并且a1可以是指参考样点的样点值,其直接位于与从当前样点1810的延长线1830交叉的参考样点的右侧,并且a2可以是指参考样点的样点值,其位于与从当前样点1810的延长线1830交叉的参考样点的右侧第二位。At this time, fk, i may refer to the i+1th (0<=i<=3) filtering of the k+1th filter in the filter set including M+1 (M is an integer) filter device coefficient. a0 may refer to the sample point value of the reference sample that intersects the extension line 1830 from the current sample point 1810, and a-1 may refer to the sample point value of the reference sample point that lies directly on the extension line 1830 from the current sample point 1810 To the left of the reference sample crossed by line 1830, and a1 may refer to the sample value of the reference sample that is directly to the right of the reference sample crossed by line 1830 extending from the current sample 1810, and a2 may be Refers to the sample point value of the reference sample point, which is located second to the right of the reference sample point that intersects the extension line 1830 from the current sample point 1810 .

在上文中,已经根据式1描述了通过使用参考样点值a0、a-1、a1、a2来产生当前样点的预测样点值的内容,但是不限于此,并且本领域的普通技术人员可以理解的是,可以基于a0通过使用邻近的各种参考样点的样点值来产生当前样点的预测值。例如,可以通过使用a-2、a-1、a0和a1来产生当前样点的预测样点值。另外,可以通过使用a0、a1、a2和a3来产生当前样点的预测样点值。In the above, the content of generating the predicted sample point value of the current sample point by using the reference sample point values a0, a-1, a1, a2 has been described according to formula 1, but it is not limited thereto, and those of ordinary skill in the art It can be understood that the predicted value of the current sample point can be generated based on a0 by using sample point values of various adjacent reference sample points. For example, the predicted sample point value of the current sample point can be generated by using a-2, a-1, a0 and a1. In addition, the predicted sample point value of the current sample point can be generated by using a0, a1, a2, and a3.

图像解码装置100可以基于当前样点1810与参考样点之间的距离和当前块1800的尺寸确定在多个滤波器fk(0<=k<=M)中将用于当前样点1810的滤波器。例如,图像解码装置100可以将当前块的尺寸乘以预定的比率预先确定多个滤波器fk(0<=k<=M)的每一个被使用的样点的范围,并且将在包括当前样点1810的样点的范围内使用的滤波器确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。例如,包括在滤波器集中的滤波器的数量可以是四个。换句话说,滤波器集可以包括滤波器f0、f1、f2和f3。The image decoding device 100 may determine the filter to be used for the current sample 1810 among the plurality of filters fk (0<=k<=M) based on the distance between the current sample 1810 and the reference sample and the size of the current block 1800 device. For example, the image decoding device 100 may multiply the size of the current block by a predetermined ratio to predetermine the range of samples used by each of the plurality of filters fk (0<=k<=M), and will include the current sample The filter used within the range of samples of point 1810 is determined to be the filter for the current sample 1810 . For example, the number of filters included in the filter set may be four. In other words, the filter set may include filters f0, f1, f2 and f3.

当当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的上侧的参考样点之间的距离为[0,size/4),或者当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的左侧的参考样点之间的距离为[0,size/4)时,图像解码装置100可以将f0确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。这里,size可以是当前块1800的尺寸(高度或宽度)。当当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的上侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/4,size/2)并且当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的左侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/4,size),或者当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的左侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/4,size/2)并且当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的上侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/4,size)时,图像解码装置100可以将f1确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。当当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的上侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/2,3*size/4)并且当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的左侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/2,size),或者当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的左侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/2,3*size/4)并且当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的上侧的参考样点之间的距离为[size/2,size)时,图像解码装置100可以将f2确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。When the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the upper side of the current sample point 1810 is [0, size/4), or the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the left side of the current sample point 1810 When the distance between is [0, size/4), the image decoding device 100 may determine f0 as the filter for the current sample point 1810. Here, size may be the size (height or width) of the current block 1800 . When the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the upper side of the current sample point 1810 is [size/4, size/2) and the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the left side of the current sample point 1810 The distance between is [size/4, size), or the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point located on the left side of the current sample point 1810 is [size/4, size/2) and the current sample point 1810 When the distance from the reference sample point above the current sample point 1810 is [size/4, size), the image decoding device 100 may determine f1 as the filter for the current sample point 1810 . When the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the upper side of the current sample point 1810 is [size/2, 3*size/4) and the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the left side of the current sample point 1810 The distance between the sample points is [size/2, size), or the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point located to the left of the current sample point 1810 is [size/2, 3*size/4) and When the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point above the current sample point 1810 is [size/2, size), the image decoding device 100 may determine f2 as a filter for the current sample point 1810 .

当当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的上侧的参考样点之间的距离为[3*size/4,size)并且当前样点1810与位于当前样点1810的左侧的参考样点之间的距离为[3*size/4,size))时,图像解码装置100可以将f3确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。When the distance between the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the upper side of the current sample point 1810 is [3*size/4, size) and the current sample point 1810 and the reference sample point on the left side of the current sample point 1810 When the distance between is [3*size/4, size)), the image decoding device 100 may determine f3 as the filter for the current sample point 1810.

换句话说,参考图18,当当前样点1810位于第一区域1850中时,图像解码装置100可以将f0确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。当当前样点1810位于第二区域1860中时,图像解码装置100可以将f1确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。当当前样点1810位于第三区域1870中时,图像解码装置100可以将f2确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。当当前样点1810位于第四区域1880中时,图像解码装置100可以将f4确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。In other words, referring to FIG. 18 , when the current sample point 1810 is located in the first region 1850 , the image decoding device 100 may determine f0 as a filter for the current sample point 1810 . When the current sample 1810 is located in the second region 1860 , the image decoding device 100 may determine f1 as a filter for the current sample 1810 . When the current sample point 1810 is located in the third region 1870 , the image decoding device 100 may determine f2 as a filter for the current sample point 1810 . When the current sample point 1810 is located in the fourth region 1880 , the image decoding device 100 may determine f4 as a filter for the current sample point 1810 .

这里,在滤波器f0、f1、f2和f3的平滑强度中,用于与参考样点距离最近的样点的滤波器f0的平滑强度可以最小,并且用于与参考样点距离最远的样点的滤波器f0的平滑强度可以最大。Here, among the smoothing strengths of the filters f0, f1, f2, and f3, the smoothing strength of the filter f0 for the sample point closest to the reference sample point may be the smallest, and the smoothing strength of the filter f0 for the sample point farthest from the reference sample point may be the smallest. The smoothing strength of the filter f0 of the point can be maximized.

在上文中,已经参考图18描述了图像解码装置100通过对当前块的滤波器使用四个来对当前块执行帧内预测的内容,但是不限于此,并且本领域的普通技术人员可以理解的是,图像解码装置100可以通过使用各种数量的滤波器来对当前块执行帧内预测。这里,可以基于滤波器的数量来不同地确定使用每个滤波器的样点的范围。例如,参考图18,当将用于当前块1800的滤波器的数量确定为三个时,图像解码装置100可以将第三区域1870和第四区域1880统合在一起,并且当当前样点1810位于第三区域1870或第四区域1880中时,图像解码装置100可以将f3确定为用于当前样点1810的滤波器。In the above, it has been described with reference to FIG. 18 that the image decoding device 100 performs intra prediction on the current block by using four filters for the current block, but it is not limited thereto, and those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that Yes, the image decoding device 100 may perform intra prediction on a current block by using various numbers of filters. Here, the range of samples using each filter may be differently determined based on the number of filters. For example, referring to FIG. 18 , when the number of filters used for the current block 1800 is determined to be three, the image decoding device 100 may integrate the third area 1870 and the fourth area 1880 together, and when the current sample point 1810 is located at When in the third region 1870 or the fourth region 1880 , the image decoding device 100 may determine f3 as the filter for the current sample point 1810 .

另外,图像解码装置100可以基于当前块中的样点与参考样点之间的距离来预先确定fk(0<=k<=M)的每一个被使用的样点的范围,并且将用于在包括当前样点的样点的范围内的滤波器确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。In addition, the image decoding device 100 may predetermine the range of samples used for each of fk (0<=k<=M) based on the distance between the samples in the current block and the reference samples, and will be used for A filter within a range of samples including the current sample is determined as a filter for the current sample.

例如,当当前样点和参考样点之间的垂直和水平距离中的最小距离小于4时,图像解码装置100可以将f0确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。当当前样点和参考样点之间的垂直和水平距离中的最小距离大于或等于4且小于8时,图像解码装置100可以将f1确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。当当前样点和参考样点之间的垂直和水平距离中的最小距离大于或等于8且小于16时,图像解码装置100可以将f2确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。当当前样点和参考样点之间的垂直和水平距离中的最小距离大于或等于16且小于32时,图像解码装置100可以将f3确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。当当前样点和参考样点之间的垂直和水平距离中的最小距离大于或等于32且小于64时,图像解码装置100可以将f4确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。当当前样点和参考样点之间的垂直和水平距离中的最小距离大于64时,图像解码装置100可以将f5确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。在这种情况下,图像解码装置100可以根据当前块的尺寸来改变用于当前块的滤波器的数量。已经描述了图像解码装置100可以基于当前样点和参考样点之间的垂直和水平距离中的最小距离来预先确定多个滤波器fk(0<=k<=M)的每一个被使用的样点的范围,但是不限于此,本领域的普通技术人可以理解的是,图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的帧内预测模式确定与从当前样点的预测方向的延长线交叉的参考样点之间的距离,并且基于参考样点之间的距离预先确定多个滤波器fk(0<=k<=M)的每一个被使用的样点的范围。For example, when the minimum distance among the vertical and horizontal distances between the current sample point and the reference sample point is less than 4, the image decoding device 100 may determine f0 as the filter for the current sample point. When the minimum distance among the vertical and horizontal distances between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than or equal to 4 and less than 8, the image decoding device 100 may determine f1 as a filter for the current sample point. When the minimum distance among the vertical and horizontal distances between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than or equal to 8 and less than 16, the image decoding device 100 may determine f2 as the filter for the current sample point. When the minimum distance among the vertical and horizontal distances between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than or equal to 16 and less than 32, the image decoding device 100 may determine f3 as a filter for the current sample point. When the minimum distance among the vertical and horizontal distances between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than or equal to 32 and less than 64, the image decoding device 100 may determine f4 as the filter for the current sample point. When the minimum distance among the vertical and horizontal distances between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than 64, the image decoding device 100 may determine f5 as a filter for the current sample point. In this case, the image decoding device 100 may change the number of filters for the current block according to the size of the current block. It has been described that the image decoding apparatus 100 can predetermine each of the plurality of filters fk (0<=k<=M) to be used based on the minimum distance among the vertical and horizontal distances between the current sample point and the reference sample point range of sample points, but is not limited thereto. Those skilled in the art can understand that the image decoding device 100 can determine the reference sample that intersects with the extension line from the prediction direction of the current sample point based on the intra prediction mode of the current block. The distance between the points, and based on the distance between the reference sample points, predetermine the range of the sample points used by each of the plurality of filters fk (0<=k<=M).

另外,已经描述了图像解码装置100可以将当前块的尺寸乘以预定的比率预先确定多个滤波器fk(0<=k<=M)的每一个被使用的样点的范围,或者基于当前块中的样点与参考样点之间的距离预先确定fk(0<=k<=M)的每一个被使用的样点的范围,但是不限于此,本领域的普通技术人员可以理解的是,图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的尺寸和当前块中的样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个的各种方法来确定多个滤波器的每一个被使用的样点的范围。In addition, it has been described that the image decoding device 100 may multiply the size of the current block by a predetermined ratio to predetermine the range of samples used by each of the plurality of filters fk (0<=k<=M), or based on the current The distance between the sample point in the block and the reference sample point predetermines the range of each used sample point of fk (0<=k<=M), but it is not limited thereto, and those of ordinary skill in the art can understand Yes, the image decoding device 100 can determine the number of samples used by each of the multiple filters based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the samples in the current block and the reference samples. scope.

另外,图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的尺寸(高度或宽度)来确定用于当前块的滤波器的数量,并且确定与滤波器的数量相对应的滤波器。例如,如果当前块的尺寸大于或等于预定的尺寸,图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f0、f1、f2、...、和fM-1确定为用于当前块的滤波器。当当前块的尺寸小于预定的尺寸时,图像解码装置100可以将用于当前块的滤波器的数量确定为小于M的预定的数量K(K为整数)。在这种情况下,视频解码装置100可以根据在对滤波器f0、f1、f2、...、和fM-1可能组合的各种组合中预定的组合来确定预定的数量K个滤波器。例如,图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f0、f1、f2、...、和fK-1确定为用于当前块的滤波器。例如,当将用于当前块的滤波器的数量确定为两个时,图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f0和f1确定为用于当前块的滤波器。另外,当将用于当前块的滤波器的数量确定为两个时,图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f0和fM-1确定为用于当前块的滤波器。Also, the image decoding device 100 may determine the number of filters for the current block based on the size (height or width) of the current block, and determine a filter corresponding to the number of filters. For example, if the size of the current block is greater than or equal to a predetermined size, the image decoding device 100 may determine filters f0, f1, f2, . . . , and fM-1 as filters for the current block. When the size of the current block is smaller than the predetermined size, the image decoding device 100 may determine the number of filters for the current block to be a predetermined number K (K is an integer) smaller than M. In this case, the video decoding apparatus 100 may determine the predetermined number K filters according to predetermined combinations among various combinations of possible combinations of the filters f0, f1, f2, . . . , and fM-1. For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine filters f0, f1, f2, . . . , and fK-1 as filters for the current block. For example, when the number of filters for the current block is determined to be two, the image decoding device 100 may determine filters f0 and f1 as filters for the current block. Also, when the number of filters for the current block is determined to be two, the image decoding device 100 may determine filters f0 and fM-1 as filters for the current block.

例如,图像解码装置100可以如下确定包括用于对当前块执行帧内预测的滤波器f0、f1、f2和f3的4抽头滤波器集。例如,图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f0的系数确定为{-2,126,4,0}。(所述滤波器的系数是指应用于预定的分数像素位置的滤波器的系数)图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f1的系数确定为{12,99,18,-1}。图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f2的系数确定为{21,82,23,2}。图像解码装置100可以将滤波器f3的系数确定为{31,63,33,1}。这里,滤波器f0可以是在滤波器f0、f1、f2和f3中平滑强度最弱的滤波器,并且滤波器f3可以是在滤波器f0、f1、f2和f3中平滑强度最强的滤波器。同时,滤波器的系数值不限于上面列出的系数值,本领域的普通技术人员可以理解的是,滤波器的系数值可以稍微改变(例如+1至5,-1至5)而使用。For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine a 4-tap filter set including filters f0, f1, f2, and f3 for performing intra prediction on a current block as follows. For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine the coefficients of the filter f0 as {−2, 126, 4, 0}. (The filter coefficients refer to the filter coefficients applied to predetermined fractional pixel positions) The image decoding device 100 may determine the coefficients of the filter f1 as {12, 99, 18, -1}. The image decoding device 100 may determine the coefficients of the filter f2 as {21, 82, 23, 2}. The image decoding device 100 may determine the coefficients of the filter f3 as {31, 63, 33, 1}. Here, filter f0 may be the filter with the weakest smoothing strength among filters f0, f1, f2, and f3, and filter f3 may be the filter with the strongest smoothing strength among filters f0, f1, f2, and f3 . Meanwhile, the coefficient values of the filter are not limited to the coefficient values listed above, those skilled in the art can understand that the coefficient values of the filter can be slightly changed (eg +1 to 5, -1 to 5) and used.

同时,图像解码装置100可以基于当前样点与参考样点之间的距离来确定用于确定当前样点的预测样点值的参考样点的数量。图像解码装置100可以通过使用与参考样点的数量相对应的参考样点来对当前样点执行滤波。Meanwhile, the image decoding device 100 may determine the number of reference samples for determining the predicted sample value of the current sample based on the distance between the current sample and the reference sample. The image decoding device 100 may perform filtering on a current sample by using reference samples corresponding to the number of reference samples.

例如,当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离大于或等于预定的距离时,图像解码装置100可以通过使用M个参考样点对当前样点执行滤波来产生当前样点的预测样点值。当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离小于预定的距离时,图像解码装置100可以通过使用小于M个数量的参考样点对当前样点执行滤波来产生当前样点的预测样点值。例如,当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离小于预定的距离时,图像解码装置100可以通过使用一个或两个参考样点执行滤波来产生当前样点的预测样点值。当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离大于或等于预定的距离时,图像解码装置100可以通过使用四个或更多个参考样点执行滤波来产生当前样点的预测样点值。For example, when the distance between the current sample and the reference sample is greater than or equal to a predetermined distance, the image decoding device 100 may generate a predicted sample value of the current sample by performing filtering on the current sample using M reference samples . When the distance between the current sample and the reference sample is less than the predetermined distance, the image decoding device 100 may generate a predicted sample value of the current sample by performing filtering on the current sample using less than M number of reference samples. For example, when the distance between the current sample and the reference sample is less than a predetermined distance, the image decoding device 100 may generate a predicted sample value of the current sample by performing filtering using one or two reference samples. When the distance between the current sample and the reference sample is greater than or equal to the predetermined distance, the image decoding device 100 may generate a predicted sample value of the current sample by performing filtering using four or more reference samples.

图像解码装置100可以通过调整滤波器的抽头的数来确定用于对当前样点执行滤波的参考样点的数量。例如,当当前样点和参考样点之间的距离大于或等于预定的距离时,图像解码装置100可以将具有4抽头或更多个抽头的滤波器确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离小于预定的距离时,图像解码装置100可以将1抽头滤波器或2抽头滤波器确定为用于当前样点的滤波器。这里,图像解码设备100可以不执行滤波而不是通过使用1抽头滤波器来执行滤波。The image decoding device 100 may determine the number of reference samples used to perform filtering on a current sample by adjusting the number of taps of the filter. For example, when the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than or equal to a predetermined distance, the image decoding device 100 may determine a filter having 4 taps or more as a filter for the current sample point. When the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is less than a predetermined distance, the image decoding device 100 may determine a 1-tap filter or a 2-tap filter as a filter for the current sample point. Here, the image decoding device 100 may not perform filtering instead of performing filtering by using a 1-tap filter.

另外,图像解码装置100可以通过固定滤波器的抽头数,并且调整一些滤波器的系数值来确定用于对当前样点执行滤波的参考样点的数量。In addition, the image decoding device 100 may determine the number of reference samples used to perform filtering on the current sample by fixing the number of taps of the filter and adjusting coefficient values of some filters.

例如,图像解码装置100可以将滤波器的抽头数确定为4抽头,并且当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离小于预定的距离时,将用于当前样点的滤波器的系数确定为{0,128,0,0}。当当前样点与参考样点之间的距离大于或等于预定的距离时,图像解码装置100可以将用于当前样点的滤波器的系数确定为{32,63,31,1}。For example, the image decoding device 100 may determine the number of taps of the filter as 4 taps, and when the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is less than a predetermined distance, determine the coefficient of the filter for the current sample point as {0, 128, 0, 0}. When the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point is greater than or equal to the predetermined distance, the image decoding device 100 may determine the coefficients of the filter for the current sample point as {32, 63, 31, 1}.

图像解码装置100可以基于当前块中的当前样点的位置、帧内预测模式和当前块的尺寸从用于当前块的滤波器中确定用于当前样点的滤波器。The image decoding device 100 may determine a filter for the current sample from among filters for the current block based on the position of the current sample in the current block, the intra prediction mode, and the size of the current block.

例如,当当前样点的x轴坐标值小于预定的值,或者当前样点的y轴坐标值小于预定的值时,图像解码装置100可以确定使用第一滤波器,否则可以确定使用第二滤波器。For example, when the x-axis coordinate value of the current sample point is smaller than a predetermined value, or the y-axis coordinate value of the current sample point is smaller than a predetermined value, the image decoding device 100 may determine to use the first filter, otherwise it may determine to use the second filter device.

这里,第一滤波器的平滑强度小于第二滤波器,并且可以具有锋利的特性。这里,预定的值可以是8,然而不限于此,并且可以是4的倍数的各种值之一。Here, the smoothing strength of the first filter is smaller than that of the second filter, and may have sharp characteristics. Here, the predetermined value may be 8, but is not limited thereto, and may be one of various values that are multiples of 4.

当当前块的帧内预测模式的索引值小于或等于模式34的索引值时,图像解码装置100可以确定是否当前块的宽度小于或等于第一值且当前块的高度小于或等于第二值。这里,第一值可以小于第二值。例如,第一值可以是16,第二值可以是32。When the index value of the intra prediction mode of the current block is less than or equal to the index value of mode 34, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether the width of the current block is less than or equal to a first value and the height of the current block is less than or equal to a second value. Here, the first value may be smaller than the second value. For example, the first value may be 16 and the second value may be 32.

当当前块的帧内预测模式的索引值大于模式34的索引值时,图像解码装置100可以确定当前块的宽度是否小于或等于第一值且当前块的高度是否小于或等于第二值。这里,第一值可以小于第二值。第一值可以是16,第二值可以是32。When the index value of the intra prediction mode of the current block is greater than the index value of mode 34, the image decoding device 100 may determine whether the width of the current block is less than or equal to a first value and the height of the current block is less than or equal to a second value. Here, the first value may be smaller than the second value. The first value may be 16 and the second value may be 32.

图像解码装置100可以基于当前块的宽度和高度来确定用于当前块的滤波器。例如,当当前块的宽度小于或等于第一值,并且当前块的高度小于或等于第二值时,图像解码装置100可以将f0和f1确定为用于当前块的滤波器。当当前块的宽度大于第一值,或者当前块的宽度大于第二值时,图像解码装置100可以将f2和f3确定为用于当前块的滤波器。The image decoding device 100 may determine a filter for a current block based on the width and height of the current block. For example, when the width of the current block is less than or equal to the first value and the height of the current block is less than or equal to the second value, the image decoding device 100 may determine f0 and f1 as filters for the current block. When the width of the current block is greater than the first value, or the width of the current block is greater than the second value, the image decoding device 100 may determine f2 and f3 as filters for the current block.

图19为用于说明根据本公开的实施例,基于编码顺序标志将编码单元之间的编码(解码)顺序确定为正向或反向,根据确定的编码(解码)顺序右侧参考线或上侧参考线可以用于帧内预测的图。FIG. 19 is used to illustrate that according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, the encoding (decoding) order between coding units is determined as forward or reverse based on the encoding order flag, and the reference line on the right or upper side according to the determined encoding (decoding) order Side reference lines can be used for intra-predicted graphs.

参考图19,最大编码单元1950被划分为多个编码单元1956、1958、1960、1962、1968、1970、1972、1974、1980、1982、1984和1986。最大编码单元1950对应于树结构的最高节点1900。另外,多个编码单元1956、1958、1960、1962、1968、1970、1972、1974、1980、1982、1984、1986分别对应于多个节点1906、1908、1910、1912、1918、1920、1922、1924、1930、1932、1934和1936。指示树结构中的编码顺序的上段编码顺序标志1902、1914和1926对应于箭头1952、1964和1976,并且上段编码顺序标志1904、1916和1928对应于箭头1954、1966和1978。Referring to FIG. 19 , a maximum coding unit 1950 is divided into a plurality of coding units 1956 , 1958 , 1960 , 1962 , 1968 , 1970 , 1972 , 1974 , 1980 , 1982 , 1984 , and 1986 . The maximum coding unit 1950 corresponds to the highest node 1900 of the tree structure. In addition, a plurality of encoding units 1956, 1958, 1960, 1962, 1968, 1970, 1972, 1974, 1980, 1982, 1984, 1986 respectively correspond to a plurality of nodes 1906, 1908, 1910, 1912, 1918, 1920, 1922, 1924 , 1930, 1932, 1934 and 1936. Upper coding order marks 1902 , 1914 and 1926 indicating the coding order in the tree structure correspond to arrows 1952 , 1964 and 1976 , and upper coding order marks 1904 , 1916 and 1928 correspond to arrows 1954 , 1966 and 1978 .

上段编码顺序标志指示在相同深度的四个编码单元中位于上段的两个编码单元的编码顺序。当上段编码顺序标志为0时,则沿正向执行编码。与此相反,当上段编码顺序标志为1时,则沿反向执行编码。The upper coding order flag indicates the coding order of two coding units located in the upper row among the four coding units of the same depth. When the coding sequence flag of the upper segment is 0, coding is performed in the forward direction. On the contrary, when the coding sequence flag of the upper segment is 1, coding is performed in the reverse direction.

类似地,下段编码顺序标志指示在相同深度的四个编码单元中位于下段的两个编码单元的编码顺序。当下段编码顺序标志为0时,则沿正向执行编码。与此相反,当下段编码顺序标志为1时,则沿反向执行编码。Similarly, the lower coding order flag indicates the coding order of two coding units located in the lower row among the four coding units of the same depth. When the lower encoding sequence flag is 0, encoding is performed in the forward direction. On the contrary, when the coding sequence flag of the lower segment is 1, coding is performed in the reverse direction.

例如,上段编码顺序标志1914为0,因此编码单元1968和1970之间的编码顺序沿着从左侧朝着右侧方向的正向被确定。另外,下段编码顺序标志1916为1,因此编码单元1972和1974之间的编码顺序沿着从右侧朝着左侧方向的反向被确定。For example, the upper coding order flag 1914 is 0, so the coding order between the coding units 1968 and 1970 is determined along the forward direction from left to right. In addition, since the lower encoding order flag 1916 is 1, the encoding order between the encoding units 1972 and 1974 is determined in the reverse direction from the right to the left.

根据实施例,可以将上段编码顺序标志和下段编码顺序标志设置为具有相同的值。例如,当上段编码顺序标志1902被确定为1时,与上段编码顺序标志1902相对应的下段编码顺序标志1904也可以被确定为1。以1比特确定上段编码顺序标志和下段编码顺序标志的值,因此编码顺序信息的信息量也减少。According to an embodiment, the upper encoding order flag and the lower encoding order flag may be set to have the same value. For example, when the upper coding sequence flag 1902 is determined to be 1, the lower coding sequence flag 1904 corresponding to the upper coding sequence flag 1902 may also be determined to be 1. Since the values of the upper encoding order flag and the lower encoding order flag are determined with 1 bit, the amount of information in the encoding order information is also reduced.

根据实施例,可以通过参考应用于深度小于当前编码单元的编码单元的上段编码顺序标志和下段编码顺序标志中的至少一个来确定当前编码单元的上段编码顺序标志和下段编码顺序标志。例如,应用于编码单元1980、1982、1984和1986的上段编码顺序标志1926和下段编码顺序标志1928可以基于应用于编码单元1972和1974的下段编码顺序标志1916被确定。因此,上段编码顺序标志1926和下段编码顺序标志1928可以被确定为与编码顺序标志1916相同的值。从当前编码单元的上段编码单元确定上段编码顺序标志和下段编码顺序标志的值,因此编码顺序信息不是从比特流获得的。因此,编码顺序信息的信息量也减少。According to an embodiment, the upper coding order flag and the lower coding order flag of the current coding unit may be determined by referring to at least one of the upper coding order flag and the lower coding order flag applied to a coding unit having a depth smaller than the current coding unit. For example, upper coding order flag 1926 and lower coding order flag 1928 applied to coding units 1980 , 1982 , 1984 , and 1986 may be determined based on lower coding order flag 1916 applied to coding units 1972 and 1974 . Therefore, the upper encoding order flag 1926 and the lower encoding order flag 1928 may be determined to be the same value as the encoding order flag 1916 . The values of the upper coding order flag and the lower coding order flag are determined from the upper coding unit of the current coding unit, so the coding order information is not obtained from the bitstream. Therefore, the information amount of the encoding sequence information is also reduced.

这里,可以使用包括在当前编码单元1986之前经过解码的右侧相邻编码单元1958中的样点的数据和包括在上侧相邻编码单元中的样点的数据1980和1982,因此图像解码装置100可以通过使用包括在右侧相邻编码单元1958中的样点(右侧参考线)的数据和包括在上侧相邻编码单元1980和1982中的样点(上侧参考线)的数据来对根据本公开的实施例执行预测。Here, data including samples in the right adjacent coding unit 1958 decoded before the current coding unit 1986 and data 1980 and 1982 including samples in the upper side adjacent coding units may be used, so the image decoding device 100 can be determined by using data of samples included in the right adjacent encoding unit 1958 (right reference line) and data of samples included in upper adjacent encoding units 1980 and 1982 (upper reference line) Prediction is performed on embodiments according to the present disclosure.

换句话说,已经参考图17至18描述了基于当前块的尺寸和当前样点与参考样点之间的距离中的至少一个来确定使用于当前样点的滤波器,并且基于所确定的滤波器适应地执行帧内预测的一种方法和装置,并且已经描述了在根据对现有编码单元的编码和解码顺序来执行编码和解码的前提下,基于与当前块的上侧或左侧角相邻的参考样点来执行帧内预测的内容,但是不限于此,并且本领域的普通技术人员可以理解的是,如图19所示,当一些相邻编码单元之间的编码/解码顺序是右侧编码单元或者左侧编码单元的反向顺序时,可以基于与当前块的上侧或右侧角相邻的参考样点来执行帧内预测。In other words, it has been described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 18 that the filter used for the current sample is determined based on at least one of the size of the current block and the distance between the current sample and the reference sample, and based on the determined filter A method and apparatus for adaptively performing intra prediction by a device, and it has been described that on the premise that encoding and decoding are performed according to the encoding and decoding order of existing coding units, based on the upper or left angle with the current block Adjacent reference samples are used to perform intra-frame prediction, but it is not limited thereto, and those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that, as shown in Figure 19, when the encoding/decoding order between some adjacent coding units When the right CU or the reverse order of the left CU, intra prediction may be performed based on reference samples adjacent to the upper or right corner of the current block.

根据本公开的各种实施例,可以通过基于当前才样点与参考样点之间的距离适应地确定在使用于前样点的滤波器来提高预测准确度,并且可以产生自然的图案的预测块。According to various embodiments of the present disclosure, the prediction accuracy can be improved by adaptively determining the filter currently used for the previous sample point based on the distance between the current sample point and the reference sample point, and a prediction of a natural pattern can be produced. piece.

换句话说,可以通过对与参考样点接近的样点使用平滑强度小且具有锋利特性的滤波器来提高预测准确度。另外,可以通过对远离参考样点的样点使用平滑强度强的滤波器来产生自然的图案的预测块。In other words, prediction accuracy can be improved by using a filter with less smoothing strength and sharp characteristics for samples close to the reference sample. In addition, predictive blocks with natural patterns can be generated by applying filters with strong smoothing strength to samples far from the reference samples.

另外,可以通过产生具有自然的图案和高预测准确度的预测块来进行指示突然的预测误差(prediction error)的补正,因此可以提高变换效率。In addition, correction indicating a sudden prediction error can be performed by generating a prediction block with a natural pattern and high prediction accuracy, and thus transformation efficiency can be improved.

到目前为止,已经描述了本公开的各种实施例。本领域的普通技术人员应理解的是,本公开在不脱离本公开的本质特征的情况下,可以以修改的形状实现本公开。应当仅在描述性意义上而不出于限制的目的考虑这些实施例。因此,本公开的范围不是由本公开的详细描述而是由所附权利要求限定的,并且本范围内的所有差异将被解释为被包括在本公开中。Various embodiments of the present disclosure have been described so far. It should be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art that the present disclosure can be realized in a modified shape without departing from the essential characteristics of the present disclosure. These embodiments should be considered in a descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation. Therefore, the scope of the disclosure is defined not by the detailed description of the disclosure but by the appended claims, and all differences within the scope will be construed as being included in the present disclosure.

本公开的实施例可作为计算机程序被编写并且可用使用计算机可读记录介质来执行程序的通用数字计算机加以实现。计算机可读记录介质的示例包括磁存储介质(例如,ROM、软盘、硬盘等)、光学记录介质(例如,CD-ROM或DVD)等。Embodiments of the present disclosure can be written as computer programs and implemented with general-purpose digital computers that execute the programs using a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include magnetic storage media (eg, ROM, floppy disk, hard disk, etc.), optical recording media (eg, CD-ROM or DVD), and the like.

Claims (3)

1.一种图像解码方法,其特征在于,包括如下步骤:1. an image decoding method, is characterized in that, comprises the steps: 根据当前块的帧内预测模式而将左侧块的样点确定为参考样点;determining the samples of the left block as reference samples according to the intra prediction mode of the current block; 当表示所述当前块中的x轴上的当前样点的位置的x坐标值小于或等于预定值时,在多个滤波器中选择第一滤波器;When the x-coordinate value representing the position of the current sample point on the x-axis in the current block is less than or equal to a predetermined value, selecting a first filter among multiple filters; 当所述x坐标值大于预定值时,在所述多个滤波器中选择第二滤波器;selecting a second filter among the plurality of filters when the x-coordinate value is greater than a predetermined value; 将所述第一滤波器及所述第二滤波器中的一个应用于所述参考样点而生成用于当前样点的预测样点,applying one of the first filter and the second filter to the reference samples to generate prediction samples for the current sample, 其中,所述第一滤波器包括第一滤波器系数及第二滤波器系数,Wherein, the first filter includes first filter coefficients and second filter coefficients, 所述第二滤波器包括第三滤波器系数及第四滤波器系数,The second filter includes third filter coefficients and fourth filter coefficients, 所述第一滤波器的平滑强度小于所述第二滤波器的平滑强度,the smoothing strength of the first filter is less than the smoothing strength of the second filter, 所述当前块是亮度块或色度块。The current block is a luma block or a chroma block. 2.一种图像编码方法,其特征在于,包括如下步骤:2. An image coding method, characterized in that, comprising the steps of: 根据当前块的帧内预测模式而将左侧块的样点确定为参考样点;determining the samples of the left block as reference samples according to the intra prediction mode of the current block; 当表示所述当前块中的x轴上的当前样点的位置的x坐标值小于或等于预定值时,在多个滤波器中选择第一滤波器;When the x-coordinate value representing the position of the current sample point on the x-axis in the current block is less than or equal to a predetermined value, select the first filter among the plurality of filters; 当所述x坐标值大于预定值时,在所述多个滤波器中选择第二滤波器;selecting a second filter among the plurality of filters when the x-coordinate value is greater than a predetermined value; 将所述第一滤波器及所述第二滤波器中的一个应用于所述参考样点而生成用于当前样点的预测样点,applying one of the first filter and the second filter to the reference samples to generate prediction samples for the current sample, 其中,所述第一滤波器包括第一滤波器系数及第二滤波器系数,Wherein, the first filter includes first filter coefficients and second filter coefficients, 所述第二滤波器包括第三滤波器系数及第四滤波器系数,The second filter includes third filter coefficients and fourth filter coefficients, 所述第一滤波器的平滑强度小于所述第二滤波器的平滑强度,the smoothing strength of the first filter is less than the smoothing strength of the second filter, 所述当前块是亮度块或色度块。The current block is a luma block or a chroma block. 3.一种图像解码装置,其特征在于,包括:3. An image decoding device, characterized in that, comprising: 处理器,被配置为:Processor, configured as: 根据当前块的帧内预测模式而将左侧块的样点确定为参考样点;determining the samples of the left block as reference samples according to the intra prediction mode of the current block; 当表示所述当前块中的x轴上的当前样点的位置的x坐标值小于或等于预定值时,在多个滤波器中选择第一滤波器;When the x-coordinate value representing the position of the current sample point on the x-axis in the current block is less than or equal to a predetermined value, selecting a first filter among multiple filters; 当所述x坐标值大于预定值时,在所述多个滤波器中选择第二滤波器;selecting a second filter among the plurality of filters when the x-coordinate value is greater than a predetermined value; 将所述第一滤波器及所述第二滤波器中的一个应用于所述参考样点而生成用于当前样点的预测样点,applying one of the first filter and the second filter to the reference samples to generate prediction samples for the current sample, 其中,所述第一滤波器包括第一滤波器系数及第二滤波器系数,Wherein, the first filter includes first filter coefficients and second filter coefficients, 所述第二滤波器包括第三滤波器系数及第四滤波器系数,The second filter includes third filter coefficients and fourth filter coefficients, 所述第一滤波器的平滑强度小于所述第二滤波器的平滑强度,the smoothing strength of the first filter is less than the smoothing strength of the second filter, 所述当前块是亮度块或色度块。The current block is a luma block or a chroma block.
CN202310153413.2A 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof Pending CN116156166A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201762579255P 2017-10-31 2017-10-31
US62/579,255 2017-10-31
PCT/KR2018/013114 WO2019088700A1 (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method and device and image decoding method and device
CN201880084999.9A CN111543054B (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201880084999.9A Division CN111543054B (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN116156166A true CN116156166A (en) 2023-05-23

Family

ID=66332420

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202310134934.3A Pending CN116156165A (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof
CN201880084999.9A Active CN111543054B (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof
CN202310153413.2A Pending CN116156166A (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202310134934.3A Pending CN116156165A (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof
CN201880084999.9A Active CN111543054B (en) 2017-10-31 2018-10-31 Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof

Country Status (3)

Country Link
KR (1) KR102539068B1 (en)
CN (3) CN116156165A (en)
WO (1) WO2019088700A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102769033B1 (en) 2018-03-08 2025-02-18 삼성전자주식회사 Video decoding method and apparatus, and video encoding method and apparatus
IL279326B2 (en) 2018-06-11 2024-12-01 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd An encoding method and a standard for it, and an decoding method and a standard for it
CN110944211B (en) * 2019-11-15 2022-07-08 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Interpolation filtering method, apparatus, medium and electronic device for intra prediction
CN120500851A (en) * 2023-01-20 2025-08-15 Lg 电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for image encoding/decoding and storage medium for storing bit stream
KR20250136871A (en) * 2023-01-20 2025-09-16 엘지전자 주식회사 Video encoding/decoding method and device, and recording medium storing bitstream
WO2025048350A1 (en) * 2023-08-28 2025-03-06 삼성전자 주식회사 Encoding method, encoding device, decoding method, and decoding device for image

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103404151A (en) * 2011-06-20 2013-11-20 韩国电子通信研究院 Image encoding/decoding method and device therefor
CN106170093A (en) * 2016-08-25 2016-11-30 上海交通大学 A kind of infra-frame prediction performance boost coded method
WO2017043786A1 (en) * 2015-09-10 2017-03-16 엘지전자 주식회사 Intra prediction method and device in video coding system
KR20170116850A (en) * 2016-04-12 2017-10-20 세종대학교산학협력단 Method and apparatus for processing a video signal based on intra prediction

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20110123651A (en) * 2010-05-07 2011-11-15 한국전자통신연구원 Image coding and decoding apparatus using skip coding and method thereof
CN106688238B (en) * 2013-10-17 2019-12-17 华为技术有限公司 Improved Reference Pixel Selection and Filtering for Intra-frame Coding of Depth Maps
US10129542B2 (en) * 2013-10-17 2018-11-13 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Reference pixel selection and filtering for intra coding of depth map
KR101844698B1 (en) * 2014-05-23 2018-04-02 후아웨이 테크놀러지 컴퍼니 리미티드 Method and apparatus for pre-prediction filtering for use in block-prediction techniques
US10148953B2 (en) * 2014-11-10 2018-12-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System and method for intra prediction in video coding
US11277615B2 (en) * 2016-02-16 2022-03-15 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Intra-prediction method for reducing intra-prediction errors and device for same

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103404151A (en) * 2011-06-20 2013-11-20 韩国电子通信研究院 Image encoding/decoding method and device therefor
WO2017043786A1 (en) * 2015-09-10 2017-03-16 엘지전자 주식회사 Intra prediction method and device in video coding system
KR20170116850A (en) * 2016-04-12 2017-10-20 세종대학교산학협력단 Method and apparatus for processing a video signal based on intra prediction
CN106170093A (en) * 2016-08-25 2016-11-30 上海交通大学 A kind of infra-frame prediction performance boost coded method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111543054B (en) 2023-02-28
WO2019088700A1 (en) 2019-05-09
KR20200066638A (en) 2020-06-10
KR102539068B1 (en) 2023-06-01
CN116156165A (en) 2023-05-23
CN111543054A (en) 2020-08-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102770887B1 (en) Video encoding method and device, and video decoding method and device
CN111543054B (en) Image encoding method, image decoding method and device thereof
JP7170718B2 (en) Video decoding method, video encoding method and video decoding device
CN112514402A (en) Method and apparatus for image encoding and method and apparatus for image decoding
CN112385219B (en) Method and apparatus for image encoding and method and apparatus for image decoding
JP2024069593A (en) Video encoding method and device, video decoding method and device
KR102444295B1 (en) Video encoding method and encoding device, and video decoding method and decoding device considering hardware design
CN110870309B (en) Image encoding method and device and image decoding method and device
KR102665187B1 (en) Method and apparatus for image encoding, and method and apparatus for image decoding

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination